Help Wiki - User contributions [en]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-09-04T22:05:56Z

Kisaar24: /* INTRODUCTION */

=INTRODUCTION=

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

APS has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera.
Each kit includes:
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens
* 1x 35mm lens
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings.
* 1x 2 variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas.
* 1x 2 batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. 
 
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits] 

Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.

==CARING FOR THE CANON 6D==
APS has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': Drop this camera Point camera toward Sun. Submerge this camera in water Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car Store this camera in excessive heat or cold Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals Use excessive physical force Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
==Front Controls==
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus. The viewfinder will probably get much darker when you do. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu.
===Lens release button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.
==Top Controls==
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
====Program Exposure Mode====
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.
===Top Front Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.
===AF MODE===
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses will. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.
====Autofocus Mode Button====
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.
The settings are:
=====ONE SHOT=====
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still
=====AI FOCUS=====
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.
=====AI SERVO=====
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.
====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads "[ ] AF" on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.
====AF Micro adjustment====
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.

===DRIVE===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:
====Rectangle====
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.
====Bearded Rectangle====
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.
====Rectangle S====
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.
====Bearded Rectangle S====
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.
====Remote and Clock====
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
====Remote and Clock 2====
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO, pronounced "eye ess oh," sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial. AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.
===Metering===
====Rectangle with dot and circle====
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.
====Rectangle with circle only====
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.
====Rectangle with dot only====
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.
====Rectangle only====
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.
===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.
==Rear Controls==
===MENU Button===
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.
===INFO Button===
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again.
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====
This helps you level the 6D.
===Diopter Control===
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
===Movies and Live View===
====Live View====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever as shown to the silver camera-rear (Live View) icon. Press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power, so I never use it. It's mostly a feature for people used to point-and-shoot cameras or iPhones.
====Movies====
To shoot movies, turn the lever down to the movie camera icon, and the rear screen lights up with your live image. Press START/STOP to start and stop the recording of your movie. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. You set the resolution and a host of more things in the MOVIE menu, which only appears when this lever is set to MOVIES.
===AF-ON Button===
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
===AF-Area Mode Button===
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
===Magnification Button===
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
===Play Button===
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
===Master Controls===
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.
===Delete Button===
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.
====To Save a Suite of Settings====
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.
# Press: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > choose the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====
# To change a stored setting:
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.
# Change something.
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > carefully select the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.
====To have these settings update automatically====
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Auto update set. > SET > Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set "auto update," they both update until you change something in just one of them.

=VIDEO SETTINGS=

There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••''' 
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting. 
==MOVIE •==
===Live View Shoot===
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.
===AF Method===
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies.
===Silent LV Shoot===
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.
===Metering Timer===
This sets how long the light meter stays on.
==MOVIE ••==
===Grid display===
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.
===Movie Rec. Size===
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files.
===Resolution===
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions. 
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.
===Frame Rates===
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file. 
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps. 
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release. 
===Compression Scheme===
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great. 
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.
===Sound Recording===
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.
===Time Code===
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.
===Video Snapshot===
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''
=Wrench Settings=
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''. 
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.
==WRENCH •==
===Select folder===
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.
===File numbering===
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default ("Continuous"), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.
===Auto rotate===
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.
===Format card===
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.
==WRENCH ••==
===Auto Power Off===
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.
===LCD brightness===
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night.
===LCD ON/OFF BTN===
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.
===Quick Control Panel===
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.
===Date/Time/Zone===
This sets the clock.
===Language===
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say "Language."
===GPS===
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.
====Position Update Timing====
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.

==WRENCH •••==
===Video system===
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.
===Feature Guide===
This sets little tips to appear.
====INFO Button Display Options====
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.
===Wi-Fi===
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.
====Wi-Fi function====
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.
==WRENCH ••••==
===Sensor cleaning===
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.
===Battery info===
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.
===Certification logo display===
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.
===Custom Shooting Mode===
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.
===Clear all camera settings===
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.
===Copyright information===
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.
===Firmware version===
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed. 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-09-04T22:05:09Z

Kisaar24: /* INTRODUCTION */

=INTRODUCTION=

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

APS has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera.
Each kit includes:
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens
* 1x 35mm lens
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings.
* 1x 2 variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas.
* 1x 2 batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. 
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.

==CARING FOR THE CANON 6D==
APS has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': Drop this camera Point camera toward Sun. Submerge this camera in water Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car Store this camera in excessive heat or cold Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals Use excessive physical force Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
==Front Controls==
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus. The viewfinder will probably get much darker when you do. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu.
===Lens release button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.
==Top Controls==
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
====Program Exposure Mode====
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.
===Top Front Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.
===AF MODE===
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses will. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.
====Autofocus Mode Button====
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.
The settings are:
=====ONE SHOT=====
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still
=====AI FOCUS=====
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.
=====AI SERVO=====
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.
====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads "[ ] AF" on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.
====AF Micro adjustment====
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.

===DRIVE===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:
====Rectangle====
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.
====Bearded Rectangle====
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.
====Rectangle S====
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.
====Bearded Rectangle S====
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.
====Remote and Clock====
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
====Remote and Clock 2====
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO, pronounced "eye ess oh," sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial. AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.
===Metering===
====Rectangle with dot and circle====
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.
====Rectangle with circle only====
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.
====Rectangle with dot only====
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.
====Rectangle only====
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.
===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.
==Rear Controls==
===MENU Button===
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.
===INFO Button===
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again.
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====
This helps you level the 6D.
===Diopter Control===
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
===Movies and Live View===
====Live View====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever as shown to the silver camera-rear (Live View) icon. Press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power, so I never use it. It's mostly a feature for people used to point-and-shoot cameras or iPhones.
====Movies====
To shoot movies, turn the lever down to the movie camera icon, and the rear screen lights up with your live image. Press START/STOP to start and stop the recording of your movie. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. You set the resolution and a host of more things in the MOVIE menu, which only appears when this lever is set to MOVIES.
===AF-ON Button===
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
===AF-Area Mode Button===
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
===Magnification Button===
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
===Play Button===
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
===Master Controls===
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.
===Delete Button===
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.
====To Save a Suite of Settings====
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.
# Press: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > choose the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====
# To change a stored setting:
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.
# Change something.
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > carefully select the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.
====To have these settings update automatically====
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Auto update set. > SET > Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set "auto update," they both update until you change something in just one of them.

=VIDEO SETTINGS=

There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••''' 
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting. 
==MOVIE •==
===Live View Shoot===
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.
===AF Method===
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies.
===Silent LV Shoot===
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.
===Metering Timer===
This sets how long the light meter stays on.
==MOVIE ••==
===Grid display===
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.
===Movie Rec. Size===
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files.
===Resolution===
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions. 
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.
===Frame Rates===
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file. 
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps. 
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release. 
===Compression Scheme===
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great. 
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.
===Sound Recording===
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.
===Time Code===
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.
===Video Snapshot===
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''
=Wrench Settings=
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''. 
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.
==WRENCH •==
===Select folder===
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.
===File numbering===
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default ("Continuous"), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.
===Auto rotate===
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.
===Format card===
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.
==WRENCH ••==
===Auto Power Off===
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.
===LCD brightness===
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night.
===LCD ON/OFF BTN===
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.
===Quick Control Panel===
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.
===Date/Time/Zone===
This sets the clock.
===Language===
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say "Language."
===GPS===
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.
====Position Update Timing====
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.

==WRENCH •••==
===Video system===
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.
===Feature Guide===
This sets little tips to appear.
====INFO Button Display Options====
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.
===Wi-Fi===
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.
====Wi-Fi function====
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.
==WRENCH ••••==
===Sensor cleaning===
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.
===Battery info===
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.
===Certification logo display===
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.
===Custom Shooting Mode===
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.
===Clear all camera settings===
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.
===Copyright information===
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.
===Firmware version===
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed. 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-09-04T22:04:45Z

Kisaar24: /* INTRODUCTION */

=INTRODUCTION=

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

APS has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera.
Each kit includes:
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens
* 1x 35mm lens
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings.
* 1x 2 variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas.
* 1x 2 batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. 
::'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.

==CARING FOR THE CANON 6D==
APS has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': Drop this camera Point camera toward Sun. Submerge this camera in water Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car Store this camera in excessive heat or cold Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals Use excessive physical force Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
==Front Controls==
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus. The viewfinder will probably get much darker when you do. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu.
===Lens release button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.
==Top Controls==
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
====Program Exposure Mode====
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.
===Top Front Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.
===AF MODE===
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses will. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.
====Autofocus Mode Button====
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.
The settings are:
=====ONE SHOT=====
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still
=====AI FOCUS=====
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.
=====AI SERVO=====
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.
====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads "[ ] AF" on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.
====AF Micro adjustment====
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.

===DRIVE===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:
====Rectangle====
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.
====Bearded Rectangle====
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.
====Rectangle S====
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.
====Bearded Rectangle S====
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.
====Remote and Clock====
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
====Remote and Clock 2====
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO, pronounced "eye ess oh," sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial. AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.
===Metering===
====Rectangle with dot and circle====
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.
====Rectangle with circle only====
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.
====Rectangle with dot only====
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.
====Rectangle only====
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.
===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.
==Rear Controls==
===MENU Button===
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.
===INFO Button===
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again.
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====
This helps you level the 6D.
===Diopter Control===
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
===Movies and Live View===
====Live View====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever as shown to the silver camera-rear (Live View) icon. Press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power, so I never use it. It's mostly a feature for people used to point-and-shoot cameras or iPhones.
====Movies====
To shoot movies, turn the lever down to the movie camera icon, and the rear screen lights up with your live image. Press START/STOP to start and stop the recording of your movie. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. You set the resolution and a host of more things in the MOVIE menu, which only appears when this lever is set to MOVIES.
===AF-ON Button===
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
===AF-Area Mode Button===
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
===Magnification Button===
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
===Play Button===
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
===Master Controls===
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.
===Delete Button===
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.
====To Save a Suite of Settings====
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.
# Press: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > choose the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====
# To change a stored setting:
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.
# Change something.
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > carefully select the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.
====To have these settings update automatically====
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Auto update set. > SET > Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set "auto update," they both update until you change something in just one of them.

=VIDEO SETTINGS=

There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••''' 
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting. 
==MOVIE •==
===Live View Shoot===
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.
===AF Method===
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies.
===Silent LV Shoot===
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.
===Metering Timer===
This sets how long the light meter stays on.
==MOVIE ••==
===Grid display===
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.
===Movie Rec. Size===
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files.
===Resolution===
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions. 
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.
===Frame Rates===
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file. 
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps. 
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release. 
===Compression Scheme===
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great. 
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.
===Sound Recording===
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.
===Time Code===
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.
===Video Snapshot===
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''
=Wrench Settings=
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''. 
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.
==WRENCH •==
===Select folder===
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.
===File numbering===
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default ("Continuous"), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.
===Auto rotate===
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.
===Format card===
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.
==WRENCH ••==
===Auto Power Off===
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.
===LCD brightness===
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night.
===LCD ON/OFF BTN===
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.
===Quick Control Panel===
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.
===Date/Time/Zone===
This sets the clock.
===Language===
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say "Language."
===GPS===
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.
====Position Update Timing====
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.

==WRENCH •••==
===Video system===
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.
===Feature Guide===
This sets little tips to appear.
====INFO Button Display Options====
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.
===Wi-Fi===
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.
====Wi-Fi function====
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.
==WRENCH ••••==
===Sensor cleaning===
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.
===Battery info===
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.
===Certification logo display===
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.
===Custom Shooting Mode===
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.
===Clear all camera settings===
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.
===Copyright information===
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.
===Firmware version===
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed. 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-08-29T19:44:40Z

Kisaar24: /* Graphical Info Screen */

=INTRODUCTION=

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

APS has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The kits include a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder. The kits also include f/1.5 24mm, 35mm, and 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. There are 2 variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. Each kit contains 2 batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. 
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.

==CARING FOR THE CANON 6D==
APS has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': Drop this camera Point camera toward Sun. Submerge this camera in water Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car Store this camera in excessive heat or cold Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals Use excessive physical force Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
==Front Controls==
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus. The viewfinder will probably get much darker when you do. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu.
===Lens release button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.
==Top Controls==
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
====Program Exposure Mode====
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.
===Top Front Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.
===AF MODE===
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses will. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.
====Autofocus Mode Button====
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.
The settings are:
=====ONE SHOT=====
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still
=====AI FOCUS=====
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.
=====AI SERVO=====
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.
====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads "[ ] AF" on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.
====AF Micro adjustment====
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.

===DRIVE===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:
====Rectangle====
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.
====Bearded Rectangle====
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.
====Rectangle S====
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.
====Bearded Rectangle S====
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.
====Remote and Clock====
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
====Remote and Clock 2====
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO, pronounced "eye ess oh," sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial. AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.
===Metering===
====Rectangle with dot and circle====
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.
====Rectangle with circle only====
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.
====Rectangle with dot only====
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.
====Rectangle only====
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.
===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.
==Rear Controls==
===MENU Button===
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.
===INFO Button===
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again.
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====
This helps you level the 6D.
===Diopter Control===
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
===Movies and Live View===
====Live View====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever as shown to the silver camera-rear (Live View) icon. Press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power, so I never use it. It's mostly a feature for people used to point-and-shoot cameras or iPhones.
====Movies====
To shoot movies, turn the lever down to the movie camera icon, and the rear screen lights up with your live image. Press START/STOP to start and stop the recording of your movie. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. You set the resolution and a host of more things in the MOVIE menu, which only appears when this lever is set to MOVIES.
===AF-ON Button===
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
===AF-Area Mode Button===
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
===Magnification Button===
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
===Play Button===
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
===Master Controls===
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.
===Delete Button===
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.
====To Save a Suite of Settings====
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.
# Press: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > choose the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====
# To change a stored setting:
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.
# Change something.
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > carefully select the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.
====To have these settings update automatically====
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Auto update set. > SET > Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set "auto update," they both update until you change something in just one of them.

=VIDEO SETTINGS=

There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••''' 
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting. 
==MOVIE •==
===Live View Shoot===
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.
===AF Method===
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies.
===Silent LV Shoot===
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.
===Metering Timer===
This sets how long the light meter stays on.
==MOVIE ••==
===Grid display===
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.
===Movie Rec. Size===
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files.
===Resolution===
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions. 
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.
===Frame Rates===
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file. 
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps. 
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release. 
===Compression Scheme===
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great. 
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.
===Sound Recording===
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.
===Time Code===
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.
===Video Snapshot===
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''
=Wrench Settings=
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''. 
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.
==WRENCH •==
===Select folder===
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.
===File numbering===
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default ("Continuous"), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.
===Auto rotate===
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.
===Format card===
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.
==WRENCH ••==
===Auto Power Off===
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.
===LCD brightness===
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night.
===LCD ON/OFF BTN===
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.
===Quick Control Panel===
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.
===Date/Time/Zone===
This sets the clock.
===Language===
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say "Language."
===GPS===
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.
====Position Update Timing====
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.

==WRENCH •••==
===Video system===
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.
===Feature Guide===
This sets little tips to appear.
====INFO Button Display Options====
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.
===Wi-Fi===
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.
====Wi-Fi function====
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.
==WRENCH ••••==
===Sensor cleaning===
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.
===Battery info===
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.
===Certification logo display===
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.
===Custom Shooting Mode===
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.
===Clear all camera settings===
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.
===Copyright information===
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.
===Firmware version===
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed. 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-08-29T19:43:38Z

Kisaar24: /* AF MODE */

=INTRODUCTION=

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

APS has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The kits include a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder. The kits also include f/1.5 24mm, 35mm, and 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. There are 2 variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. Each kit contains 2 batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. 
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.

==CARING FOR THE CANON 6D==
APS has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': Drop this camera Point camera toward Sun. Submerge this camera in water Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car Store this camera in excessive heat or cold Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals Use excessive physical force Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
==Front Controls==
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus. The viewfinder will probably get much darker when you do. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu.
===Lens release button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.
==Top Controls==
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
====Program Exposure Mode====
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.
===Top Front Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.
===AF MODE===
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses will. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.
====Autofocus Mode Button====
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.
The settings are:
=====ONE SHOT=====
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still
=====AI FOCUS=====
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.
=====AI SERVO=====
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.
====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads "[ ] AF" on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.
====AF Micro adjustment====
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.

===DRIVE===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:
====Rectangle====
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.
====Bearded Rectangle====
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.
====Rectangle S====
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.
====Bearded Rectangle S====
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.
====Remote and Clock====
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
====Remote and Clock 2====
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO, pronounced "eye ess oh," sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial. AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.
===Metering===
====Rectangle with dot and circle====
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.
====Rectangle with circle only====
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.
====Rectangle with dot only====
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.
====Rectangle only====
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.
===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.
==Rear Controls==
===MENU Button===
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.
===INFO Button===
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again.
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====
This helps you level the 6D.
===Graphical Info Screen===
This is a collection of icons very similar to the QUICK SETTINGS screen to show you your shooting status. This display differs from the QUICK SETTINGS screen in that you can't set anything from here! If this big screen of settings won't go away as you're trying to shoot, press the INFO button again. You can disable any or all of these in the Wrench menu.
===Diopter Control===
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
===Movies and Live View===
====Live View====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever as shown to the silver camera-rear (Live View) icon. Press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power, so I never use it. It's mostly a feature for people used to point-and-shoot cameras or iPhones.
====Movies====
To shoot movies, turn the lever down to the movie camera icon, and the rear screen lights up with your live image. Press START/STOP to start and stop the recording of your movie. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. You set the resolution and a host of more things in the MOVIE menu, which only appears when this lever is set to MOVIES.
===AF-ON Button===
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
===AF-Area Mode Button===
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
===Magnification Button===
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
===Play Button===
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
===Master Controls===
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.
===Delete Button===
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.
====To Save a Suite of Settings====
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.
# Press: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > choose the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====
# To change a stored setting:
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.
# Change something.
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > carefully select the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.
====To have these settings update automatically====
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Auto update set. > SET > Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set "auto update," they both update until you change something in just one of them.

=VIDEO SETTINGS=

There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••''' 
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting. 
==MOVIE •==
===Live View Shoot===
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.
===AF Method===
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies.
===Silent LV Shoot===
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.
===Metering Timer===
This sets how long the light meter stays on.
==MOVIE ••==
===Grid display===
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.
===Movie Rec. Size===
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files.
===Resolution===
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions. 
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.
===Frame Rates===
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file. 
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps. 
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release. 
===Compression Scheme===
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great. 
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.
===Sound Recording===
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.
===Time Code===
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.
===Video Snapshot===
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''
=Wrench Settings=
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''. 
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.
==WRENCH •==
===Select folder===
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.
===File numbering===
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default ("Continuous"), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.
===Auto rotate===
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.
===Format card===
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.
==WRENCH ••==
===Auto Power Off===
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.
===LCD brightness===
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night.
===LCD ON/OFF BTN===
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.
===Quick Control Panel===
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.
===Date/Time/Zone===
This sets the clock.
===Language===
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say "Language."
===GPS===
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.
====Position Update Timing====
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.

==WRENCH •••==
===Video system===
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.
===Feature Guide===
This sets little tips to appear.
====INFO Button Display Options====
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.
===Wi-Fi===
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.
====Wi-Fi function====
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.
==WRENCH ••••==
===Sensor cleaning===
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.
===Battery info===
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.
===Certification logo display===
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.
===Custom Shooting Mode===
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.
===Clear all camera settings===
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.
===Copyright information===
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.
===Firmware version===
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed. 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-08-29T19:35:46Z

Kisaar24: /* CARING FOR THE CANON 6D */

=INTRODUCTION=

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

APS has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The kits include a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder. The kits also include f/1.5 24mm, 35mm, and 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. There are 2 variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. Each kit contains 2 batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. 
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.

==CARING FOR THE CANON 6D==
APS has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': Drop this camera Point camera toward Sun. Submerge this camera in water Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car Store this camera in excessive heat or cold Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals Use excessive physical force Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!
==Front Controls==
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus. The viewfinder will probably get much darker when you do. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu.
===Lens release button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.
==Top Controls==
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
====Program Exposure Mode====
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.
===Top Front Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.
===AF MODE===
===DRIVE===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:
====Rectangle====
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.
====Bearded Rectangle====
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.
====Rectangle S====
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.
====Bearded Rectangle S====
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.
====Remote and Clock====
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
====Remote and Clock 2====
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO, pronounced "eye ess oh," sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial. AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.
===Metering===
====Rectangle with dot and circle====
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.
====Rectangle with circle only====
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.
====Rectangle with dot only====
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.
====Rectangle only====
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.
===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.
==Rear Controls==
===MENU Button===
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.
===INFO Button===
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again.
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====
This helps you level the 6D.
===Graphical Info Screen===
This is a collection of icons very similar to the QUICK SETTINGS screen to show you your shooting status. This display differs from the QUICK SETTINGS screen in that you can't set anything from here! If this big screen of settings won't go away as you're trying to shoot, press the INFO button again. You can disable any or all of these in the Wrench menu.
===Diopter Control===
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
===Movies and Live View===
====Live View====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever as shown to the silver camera-rear (Live View) icon. Press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power, so I never use it. It's mostly a feature for people used to point-and-shoot cameras or iPhones.
====Movies====
To shoot movies, turn the lever down to the movie camera icon, and the rear screen lights up with your live image. Press START/STOP to start and stop the recording of your movie. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. You set the resolution and a host of more things in the MOVIE menu, which only appears when this lever is set to MOVIES.
===AF-ON Button===
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
===AF-Area Mode Button===
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
===Magnification Button===
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
===Play Button===
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
===Master Controls===
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.
===Delete Button===
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.
====To Save a Suite of Settings====
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.
# Press: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > choose the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====
# To change a stored setting:
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.
# Change something.
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) > SET > Register settings > SET > carefully select the C1 or C2 position > OK > SET.
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.
====To have these settings update automatically====
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU > WRENCH •••• > Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) > SET > Auto update set. > SET > Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set "auto update," they both update until you change something in just one of them.

=VIDEO SETTINGS=

There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••''' 
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus. 
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting. 
==MOVIE •==
===Live View Shoot===
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.
===AF Method===
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies.
===Silent LV Shoot===
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.
===Metering Timer===
This sets how long the light meter stays on.
==MOVIE ••==
===Grid display===
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.
===Movie Rec. Size===
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files.
===Resolution===
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions. 
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.
===Frame Rates===
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file. 
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps. 
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release. 
===Compression Scheme===
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great. 
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.
===Sound Recording===
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.
===Time Code===
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.
===Video Snapshot===
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''
=Wrench Settings=
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''. 
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.
==WRENCH •==
===Select folder===
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.
===File numbering===
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default ("Continuous"), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.
===Auto rotate===
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.
===Format card===
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.
==WRENCH ••==
===Auto Power Off===
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.
===LCD brightness===
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night.
===LCD ON/OFF BTN===
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.
===Quick Control Panel===
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.
===Date/Time/Zone===
This sets the clock.
===Language===
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say "Language."
===GPS===
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.
====Position Update Timing====
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.

==WRENCH •••==
===Video system===
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.
===Feature Guide===
This sets little tips to appear.
====INFO Button Display Options====
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.
===Wi-Fi===
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.
====Wi-Fi function====
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.
==WRENCH ••••==
===Sensor cleaning===
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.
===Battery info===
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.
===Certification logo display===
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.
===Custom Shooting Mode===
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.
===Clear all camera settings===
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.
===Copyright information===
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.
===Firmware version===
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed. 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-08-29T19:09:21Z

Kisaar24: /* Video Snapshot */

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-08-29T18:36:29Z

Kisaar24: /* VIDEO SETTINGS */

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-08-29T18:35:42Z

Kisaar24: /* INTRODUCTION */

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-08-29T16:12:03Z

Kisaar24: /* INTRODUCTION */

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-08-15T16:45:25Z

Kisaar24: /* INTRODUCTION */

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-08-15T16:21:47Z

Kisaar24:

APS Canon 6D Proficiency Test

2014-08-15T16:01:50Z

Kisaar24:

PLACEHOLDER

TEST COMING SOON!!!!!!!!!!!

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Canon 6D Proficiency Test

2014-08-15T16:01:22Z

Kisaar24: Created page with " Category:Media Loan"

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2014-08-15T16:00:45Z

Kisaar24: Created page with " Category:Media Loan"

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-04-02T18:38:39Z

Kisaar24:

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf Sony HXR Complete Manual - PDF] 
[http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/2014/03/27/sony-hxr-nx5u-nxcam/ Video Tutorials] 
==INTRODUCTION==
The Sony HXR-NX5U is a prosumer HD camcorder that records to memory cards utilizing the AVCHD format. This camcorder provides high quality, long duration recording with dual memory card slots, state-of-the-art G lens and 3 CMOS sensors. As with all Media Loan Equipment, '''''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE''''' for the HXR and all accessories when you check this camera out from APS.
==PRECAUTIONS==
*'''DO NOT HOLD THE CAMCORDER BY THE:'''
:::LENS HOOD
:::LCD PANEL
:::INTERNAL MICROPHONE
:::MICROPHONE OR MICROPHONE HOLDER
:::VIEWFINDER
*'''PROTECT THE HXR FROM WATER AND SOURCES OF MOISTURE OR SALT WATER/SPRAY. THE CAMERA IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE BATTERY PACK TO WATER. THE BATTERY PACK IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT SHAKE, KNOCK, DROP OR SUBJECT THE HXR TO EXCESSICE SHOCK. (NO BIKE DOLLIES!)'''
 
*'''CONNECT CANLES TO THE CAMCORDER WITH THEIR TERMINALS PLACED THE CORRECT WAY. SQUEEZING THE TERMINALS INTO THE HXR JACKS MAY DAMAGE THEM OR RESULT IN A MALFUNCTION OF THE CAMCORDER'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE CAMCORDER'S VIEWFINDER, LENS, LCD SCREEN TO THE SUN OR STRONG LIGHT SOURCE FOR EXTENDED PERIODS. INTENSE LIGHT SOURCES, ESPECIALLY THE SUN, WILL CONVERGE ON THE VIEWFINDER OR LENS AND DAMAGE THE INTERNAL PARTS OF THE CAMCORDER.'''
 
*'''ALWAYS CLOSE THE LENS COVER AND STORE IN CASE WHEN NOT IN USE'''
 
*'''DO NOT APPLY ANY LIQUID (CLEANING OR OTHERWISE) DIRECTLY TO THE LCD SCREEN'''
 
*'''IF THE CAMCORDER IS BROUGHT FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, MOISTURE MAY CONDENSE INSIDE THE CAMCORDER AND CAUSE A MALFUNCTION. WHEN YOU BRING THE HXR FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, PUT CAMCORDER IN A PLASTIC BAG AND SEAL IT TIGHTLY. REMOVE THE BAD WHEN THE AIR TEMPERATURE INSIDE THE PLASTIC BAG HAS REACHED AMBIENT TEMPERATURE(AFTER 1 HOUR)
==SUPPLYING POWER TO THE HXR==
===CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK===
APS provides two Lithium battery packs when you check out the HXR. Use the supplied AC Adapter/Charger to charge these batteries before use.
# Set the mode switch to charge
# Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
# Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
# Place the battery pack in the slot of the AC Adapter/Charger, press down, and slide battery until the charge lamp turns on and charging starts.
When the battery pack reaches a normal charge, the charge lamp turns off. You can continue to charge the battery pack for an additional hour for a full charge, which lets you use the battery a little longer. Remove the battery pack from the AC Adapter/Charger when the charge is completed.
===ATTACHING/REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK===
To attach the battery pack, press the battery against the back of the camcorder and slide it down.
 
To remove the battery pack, slide the '''POWER''' switch to '''OFF'''. Push the '''BAT RELEASE''' button and remove the battery pack.
===AC ADAPTER/CHARGER===
#Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Connect the power cord to the wall outlet
#Connect the connecting cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Set mode switch of the AC Adapter/Charger to '''VCR/CAMERA'''
#Press the connecting part of the connecting cord against the back of the HXR in the Battery slot and slide it down
* Use a nearby wall outlet when using the AC Adapter/Charger. '''Disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger from the wall outlet immediately if any malfunction occurs while using the camcorder.
* '''DO NOT''' use the AC Adapter/Charger placed in a narrow space, such as between a wall and furniture.
* '''DO NOT''' short-circuit the DC plug of the AC Adapter/Charger or battery terminal with any metallic objects. This may cause a malfunction.
* '''UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTER''' from the camcorder and wall socket when camcorder is not in use. Even if your camcorder is turned off, AC power is still supplied to it while connected to the wall outlet via the AC Adapter/Charger.
==OPERATING THE MENU==
# Set the '''POWER''' switch to ON
# Press the '''MENU''' button
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the icon of the desired menu is highlighted, then press the dial to select the menu.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired menu item is highlighted, then press the dial to select the item.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired setting is highlighted, the press the dial to select.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen. To return to the previous screen, select '''RETURN'''.
*'''TIP''': You may select menu items with the </> buttons.
**'''NOTE''': The available menu items vary depending on the context of your camcorder during recording or playback.
==MEMORY CARDS==
APS supplies two, 32GB memory cards (installed) when you check out the HXR camcorder. This should provide you with ample recording time, even at the highest quality settings. Should you require additional memory cards for your production, you can use "Memory Stick PRO Duo" media, "Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo" media, SD memory cards and, SDHC memory cards.
* '''Remeber to re-install the memory cards supplied by APS before returning the camera should you choose to use your own media to avoid charges.'''
Before recording, format the memory card(s).
# With the camcorder powered on, press the '''MODE''' button.
# Touch '''MANAGE MEDIA''' setting '''MEDIA FORMAT'''
# Select the recording media to be formatted
# Select YES. The HXR will ask you to verify your selection.
*'''TIP''': The easiest wat to retrieve your files is to make a disk image of the memory card. You can check out a card reader from Media Loan and use the MML or Non-Linear Editing Suites to make your disk image(s). You can then use Final Cut Pro/Adobe Premiere to log and transfer your video for editing.
** '''NOTE''': While [Executing...] is displayed, do not operate the buttons on the camcorder, disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger, or removing recording media from the camcorder. (The access lamp is light or flashing while formatting recording media.)
===NOTES ON RECORDING===
'''Estimated Recording Time on one 32 GB card in minutes with HD Audio Format set to Linear PCM/Dolby Digital:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! AVCHD 24M (FX) !! AVCHD 17M (FH) !! AVCHD 9M (HQ) !! AVCHD 5M (LP)
|-
| 170/180 || 225/235 || 385/435 || 605/750
|}
* When the access lamp is lit or flashing red, the camcorder is writing data on the recording media. Do not remove the battery pack or the AC Adapter/Charger.
* If a movie file exceeds 2GB during recording, the camcorder divides the file and create a new file automatically.
* The menu settings are stored in your camcorder when you turn the '''POWER''' switch to OFF. Do not remove battery pack or AC Adapter/Charger.
==RECORDING==
# Open the shutter of the lens hood.
# Slide the '''POWER''' switch to ON while pressing the green button.
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
To STOP recording, press the record button or the handle record button again.
*'''TIP''': When recording in high definition image quality (HD), the aspect ratio is fixed to 16:9. When recording in standard definition image quality (SD), you can switch the aspect ratio to 4:3.
*'''TIP''': For low angle recording, the handle record button is convenient. Release the '''HOLD''' lever to enable the handle record button. It might be helpful if you set the LCD panel face up or close it after turning it face down, or life the viewfinder up during the low angle recording.
** '''NOTE''': the camcorder will switch from Memory Card A to Memory Card B just before space runs out on Card A (and vice versa). '''Do not eject memory card that is currently being used for recording. Replace only the memory card whose slot lamp is off.
===SELECTING RECORDING QUALITY===
You can set the recording image quality to high definition image quality (HD) or standard definition image quality (SD).
To change the setting:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select HD/SD SET
===SELECTING THE RECORDING FORMAT===
You can select the recording format (bit-rate, image size, frame rate, scanning system). The default setting is HD 1080/60i FX/SD 480/60i HQ.
To change the setting value:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select REC FORMAT
If you select HD 1080/60i FX (the default), movies are recorded with the following format:
* HD - High Definition image quality
* 1080 - Effective scanning lines
* 60 - Frame Rate
* i - Scanning system
* FX - Recording mode
====SETTING DESCRIPTION====
Bit Rate:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! LP
|-
| Max 24 Mbps || Approx 17 Mbps || Approx 9 Mbps || Approx 5 Mbps
|}
Image Size:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! SP
|-
| 1920x1080/1280x720 || 1920x1080/1280x720 || HD recording 1440x1080 SD recording 720x480 || 1440x1080
|}
Frame rate: 24,30 or 60
Scanning system:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! i !! p !! pSCAN
|-
| Interlaced || Progressive || Recording images of progressive scanning as interlace signal (60i)
|}
*For a complete list of setting values, see the complete manual, available on [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf here].
**'''NOTE''': The recording mode is fixed to FX or FH with the progressive scanning system.
**'''NOTE''': When the recording format is changed to or from 720/60p, you will be prompted to reboot the camcorder. Select YES. Otherwise, you cannot switch the recording format.
==ADJUSTING THE ZOOM==
===USING THE POWER ZOOM===
The power zoom lever is pressure sensitive. For a slower zoom use less pressure and for a faster zoom use more pressure.
*'''NOTE''': Be sure to keep your finger on the power zoom lever. If you move your finger off the power zoom lever, the operation sound of the power zoom lever mat also be recorded.
===USING THE HANDLE ZOOM===
* Set the handle zoom switch to VAR or FIX
* Press the handle zoom lever to zoom in or out
When you set the handle zoom switch to VAR, you can zoom in or out at variable speed.
When you set the handle zoom switch to FIX, you can zoom in or out at fixed speed set in HANDLE ZOOM.
You cannot use the handle zoom lever when the handle zoom switch is set to OFF.
===USING THE ZOOM RING===
You can zoom at the desired speed by turning the zoom ring. Fine adjustment is also possible.
Turn the zoom ring at moderate speed. If you turn it too fast, the zoom speed may lag behind the zoom ring rotation speed, or the operation sound of the zoom may also be recorded.
====ADJUSTING THE FOCUS MANUALLY====
# Set the FOCUS switch to MAN
# Rotate the focus ring and adjust the focus.
*'''TIP''': It is easier to focus on the subject when you use the zoom function. Move the power zoom lever towards T (telephoto) to adjust the focus, and then towards W (wide angle) to adjust the zoom/compose your shot recording.
====PUSH AUTO FOCUS====
Record the subject while pressing and holding the PUSH AUTO button. If you release the button, the setting returns to manual focusing. Use this function to shift the focus on one subject to another (Rack Focus). The scenes will shift smoothly.
==ADJUSTING THE IMAGE BRIGHTNESS==
You can adjust the image brightness by adjusting the iris, gain, shutter speed or by reducing the light volume with the ND Filter.
*'''NOTE''': You cannot use the back light function and the spotlight when iris, gain and shutter speed are adjusted manually.
*'''NOTE''': AE SHIFT is not effective temporarily while you adjust the iris, gain, and shutter speed manually.
===ADJUSTING THE IRIS===
You can manually adjust the iris to control the volume of the light entering the lens. By adjusting the iris, you can change or close the aperture of the lens, which is expressed as an F value between F1.6 and F11. The volume of the light increases the more you open the aperture (decreasing F value). The volume of light decreases the more that you close the aperture (increasing F value). The current F value appears on the screen.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''IRIS''' button if "A" is displayed next to current iris value.
# Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
*'''TIP''': The F value becomes close to F3.4 as the zoom position changes from W to T even when you open the aperture by setting the F value low then F3.4, such as F1.6.
*'''TIP''': The range of focus, an important effect of the aperture, is called depth of field. The depth of field gets shallower as the aperture is opened and deeper as the aperture is closed.
===ADJUSTING THE GAIN===
You can adjust the gain manually when you do not want to use the AGC (Automatic Gain Control).
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL'''switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''GAIN''' button if "A" is displayed next to current gain value.
# Set the gain switch to H,M or L. The gain value set for the selected fain switch position appears on the screen. You can set the gain value for each gain switch from [GAIN SET] of the (CAMERA SET) menu.
===ADJUSTING THE SHUTTER SPEED===
You can manually adjust and fix the shutter speed. You can make a moving object look still or emphasize the movement of a moving subject by adjusting the shutter speed.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch
# Press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button until the shutter speed value is highlighted.
# Change the shutter speed displayed on the screen by turning the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can adjust the shutter speed in a range 1/4 second through 1/10000 second. The denominator of the set shutter speed appears on the screen when you set the shutter speed to 1/100 second. The larger the value on the screen, the faster the shutter speed.
# Press the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to lock the shutter speed. To readjust the shutter speed, do steps 2 to 4 again.
===ADJUSTING THE ND FILTER===
You can record the subject clearly by using the ND filter when the recording environment is too bright. The ND filters 1, 2, and 3 reduce the volume of light to about 1/4, 1/16 and 1/64 respectively.
If ND1 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 1. If ND2 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 2. If ND3 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 3. The ND filter indicator will stop flashing and remain on the screen.
If NDOFF flashes set the ND filter to off. The ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': If you change the ND filter to OFF, the ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': When adjusting the iris manually, the ND filter icon does not flash even if the light volume should be adjusted with the ND filter.
*'''NOTE''': If the camcorder cannot detect the ND filter position (OFF/1/2/3), ND flashes on the screen. Make sure that the ND filter is set correctly.
**'''TIP''': While recording a bright subject, diffraction may occur if you close the aperture further down, resulting in a fuzzy focus (this is a common phenomenon with video cameras). The ND filter suppresses this phenomenon and gives better recording results.
===WHITE BALANCE===
You can adjust and fix white balance according to the lighting conditions of recording environment. You can store white balance values in memory A and memory B. Unless a white balance is readjusted, values will remain even after the power has been turned off.
====SETTING WHITE BALANCE====
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button.
# Set the white balance memory switch to '''A''' or '''B'''.
# Capture a white subject, such as white paper, full-screen in the same lighting condition as the subject.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button (one push) WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B starts flashing rapidly. It will stay on when the white balance adjustment is completed and the adjusted value is stored in WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B.
*'''NOTE''': When a white balance adjustment value has not been obtained successfully, WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B turns from rapid flashing to slow flashing. Adjust the subject appropriately and set the shutter speed to auto or around 1/60, the try adjusting white balance again.
===GAIN SET===
you can set gain values for H, M, and L positions of the '''GAIN''' switch. The default settings of [H], [M] and [L] are 18 dB, 9 dB, and 0 dB respectively.
# Press the '''MENU''' button, select CAMERA SET then GAIN SET.
# Select [H], [M] or [L] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Set the gain value with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial, then press the dial. You can select the value between -6 dB and -21 dB by 3 dB. The larger the value, the higher the gain.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen.
====SMOOTH GAIN====
You can set the transition speed at which the gain setting shifts from one value to another, set for the '''GAIN''' switch positions, when you switch the '''GAIN''' switch from a position to another. You can select the transition speed from [FAST], [MIDDLE] and [SLOW] or set to [OFF]. The default setting is [OFF].
====ZEBRA STRIPING====
You can display a zebra pattern as a guide for adjusting brightness. Zebra stripes are the only real indication of lighting levels. The Zebra pattern is a stripe pattern displayed where the image will be overexposed over a certain level and detail will be lost.
You can select the brightness level between 70 and 100 or 100+. The default setting is [70]. 70 or 80 are good Luma values for Caucasian tones. 100 IRE is the upper limit of legal video and is the correct value of white.
# Press the '''MENU''' button.
# Select DISPLAY SET with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select ZEBRA with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select the appropriate level.
*'''NOTE''': When you select [ON], the Zebra icon (a square with diagonal lines) and the brightness level appear on the screen. The zebra pattern will not be recorded with the image. the default setting is [OFF].
==AUDIO SETUP==
===CHANNEL SETTING===
# Select input with the '''CH1''' (INT MIC/INPUT 1) switch and the '''CH2''' (INT MIC/INPUT1/INPUT2).
# Set '''INPUT1''' to an appropriate position for the microphone connected to the INPUT1 jack.
* LINE: For inputting sound from an audio device.
* MIC: For inputting sound from an external microphone that does not support the +48V power source (phantom power).
* MIC+48V: For inputting sound from a device that supports the +48v power source, including the supplied microphone.
When you connect a microphone to the INPUT2 jack, set the INPUT2 switch to an appropriate position for that microphone.
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INT MIC'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH POSITION !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (L) || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (R) || CH2*)
|-
| INPUT1 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2
|}
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INPUT1'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2**
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT2 || CH2**
|}
* The recording level of channel 2 is synchronized with that of channel 1 when only the internal microphone is used. The recording level of channel 2 is controlled with '''CH1''' (AUDIO LEVEL) dial and the '''CH1''' (AUTO/MAN) switch.
** You can adjust the recording levels of channel 1 and channel 2 separately.
*'''NOTE''': Do not operate the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches during recording to prevent noise from being recorded.
*'''NOTE''': When you connect a device that supports the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches to MIC+48v prior to connecting the device. When you disconnect the device, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switch to MIC first, then disconnect it.
*'''NOTE''': When you connect a microphone that does not support the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' to MIC. If you use it with the INPUT1/INPUT2 switch set to MIC+48V, it may damage or the recorded sound be distorted.
===ADJUSTING THE VOLUME===
You can adjust the volume of an internal microphone or a microphone connected to the INPUT1/INPUT2 jack.
# Set '''AUTO/MAN''' (CH1/CH2) switch of the channel to be adjust to MAN.
# Turn the '''AUDIO LEVEL''' dial to adjust the volume during recording or standby.
===SETTING THE HEADPHONE SOUND===
You can select the channel, CH1 or Ch2, to output from the headphone. You can select the channel, Ch1 or CH2 or Stereo Mix, to output from the headphone.
==TIME CODE and USER BIT==
The camcorder records movies accompanied by time data, such as time code and user bit. Display the setting screen by pressing the '''MENU''' and select (TC/UB SET) with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
You can synchronize the time code of this camcorder with the time code of another camcorder. See pages 44-45 of the complete manual ([http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf available here]) for instructions.
===PRESETTING THE TIME CODE===
# Select [TC PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select [PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select the first 2 digits with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can set the time code between 00:00:00:00 and 23:59:59:29.
# Set other digits by repeating step 3.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
===TO RESET THE TIME CODE===
You can reset the time code (00:00:00:00). Select [RESET] in step 2 of "PRESETTING THE TIME CODE."
===PRESETTING THE USER BIT===
# Select [UB PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select [PRESET] with the '''SE:/PRESET EXEC''' dial.
# Select the first 2 digits with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Set other digits by repeating step 3.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
===TO RESET THE USER BIT===
You can reset the user bit (00 00 00 00) Select [RESET in step 2 of "PRESETTING THE USER BIT."
==PLAYBACK==
Press the '''VISUAL INDEX''' button or the '''MODE''' button followed by touching '''PLAY''' then [VISUAL INDEX] on the screen. To play back movies, touch recording media you want to play back. Touch the playback mode and select the desired image quality of movies. Touch the thumbnail of the movie you want to play twice.
[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Proficiency Test

2014-04-02T18:33:10Z

Kisaar24:

==WRITTEN TEST==
Answers may be found in the [[APS_Sony_HXR_HD_Camcorder_Operating_Guide|APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide]]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions. Good luck!
 
# List the precautions you must take when using the Sony HXR-NX5U.
# Describe how to avoid condensation from affecting the Sony HXR-NX5U.
# Describe how to supply power to the camera with a battery pack and with the AC power supply.
# Describe how to select the recording quality.
# Describe how to manually adjust the focus.
# Describe how to manually set the white balance.
# Describe how to manually adjust the iris.
# Describe how to manually adjust the shutter speed.
# Why would you use the zebra stripes?
# Describe how to preset time code.
# If you need more detailed information on the operation of the Sony HXR-NX5U, where would you find the complete manual?
# What is your financial responsibility when checking out the Sony HXR-NX5U from APS?
 
==OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY==
To be done during your scheduled appointment with APS Staff.
 
# Remove the Sony HXR-NX5U from the case and identify all the parts.
# Supply power to the camera with the AC Adapter/Charger.
# Demonstrate how to properly remove and insert the supplied memory cards.
# Set the Sony HXR-NX5U on a tripod.
# Demonstrate how to set the recording quality for each memory card.
# Set the zebra stripes to 80 IRE.
# Adjust the focus, white balance, iris and shutter speed manually.
# Adjust the audio levels manually.
# Record and play back a few minutes of footage.
# Format the memory cards.
# Remove the camera from the tripod and pack neatly in its case.
[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-04-02T18:02:38Z

Kisaar24: /* CHANNEL SETTING */

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/aps_SonyHXR.pdf Sony HXR Operating Guide - PDF] 
[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf Sony HXR Complete Manual - PDF] 

[http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/2014/03/27/sony-hxr-nx5u-nxcam/ Video Tutorials]

==INTRODUCTION==
The Sony HXR-NX5U is a prosumer HD camcorder that records to memory cards utilizing the AVCHD format. This camcorder provides high quality, long duration recording with dual memory card slots, state-of-the-art G lens and 3 CMOS sensors. As with all Media Loan Equipment, '''''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE''''' for the HXR and all accessories when you check this camera out from APS.

==PRECAUTIONS==
*'''DO NOT HOLD THE CAMCORDER BY THE:'''
:::LENS HOOD
:::LCD PANEL
:::INTERNAL MICROPHONE
:::MICROPHONE OR MICROPHONE HOLDER
:::VIEWFINDER
*'''PROTECT THE HXR FROM WATER AND SOURCES OF MOISTURE OR SALT WATER/SPRAY. THE CAMERA IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE BATTERY PACK TO WATER. THE BATTERY PACK IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT SHAKE, KNOCK, DROP OR SUBJECT THE HXR TO EXCESSICE SHOCK. (NO BIKE DOLLIES!)'''
 
*'''CONNECT CANLES TO THE CAMCORDER WITH THEIR TERMINALS PLACED THE CORRECT WAY. SQUEEZING THE TERMINALS INTO THE HXR JACKS MAY DAMAGE THEM OR RESULT IN A MALFUNCTION OF THE CAMCORDER'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE CAMCORDER'S VIEWFINDER, LENS, LCD SCREEN TO THE SUN OR STRONG LIGHT SOURCE FOR EXTENDED PERIODS. INTENSE LIGHT SOURCES, ESPECIALLY THE SUN, WILL CONVERGE ON THE VIEWFINDER OR LENS AND DAMAGE THE INTERNAL PARTS OF THE CAMCORDER.'''
 
*'''ALWAYS CLOSE THE LENS COVER AND STORE IN CASE WHEN NOT IN USE'''
 
*'''DO NOT APPLY ANY LIQUID (CLEANING OR OTHERWISE) DIRECTLY TO THE LCD SCREEN'''
 
*'''IF THE CAMCORDER IS BROUGHT FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, MOISTURE MAY CONDENSE INSIDE THE CAMCORDER AND CAUSE A MALFUNCTION. WHEN YOU BRING THE HXR FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, PUT CAMCORDER IN A PLASTIC BAG AND SEAL IT TIGHTLY. REMOVE THE BAD WHEN THE AIR TEMPERATURE INSIDE THE PLASTIC BAG HAS REACHED AMBIENT TEMPERATURE(AFTER 1 HOUR)

==SUPPLYING POWER TO THE HXR==
===CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK===
APS provides two Lithium battery packs when you check out the HXR. Use the supplied AC Adapter/Charger to charge these batteries before use.
# Set the mode switch to charge
# Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
# Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
# Place the battery pack in the slot of the AC Adapter/Charger, press down, and slide battery until the charge lamp turns on and charging starts.
When the battery pack reaches a normal charge, the charge lamp turns off. You can continue to charge the battery pack for an additional hour for a full charge, which lets you use the battery a little longer. Remove the battery pack from the AC Adapter/Charger when the charge is completed.
===ATTACHING/REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK===
To attach the battery pack, press the battery against the back of the camcorder and slide it down.
 
To remove the battery pack, slide the '''POWER''' switch to '''OFF'''. Push the '''BAT RELEASE''' button and remove the battery pack.
===AC ADAPTER/CHARGER===
#Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Connect the power cord to the wall outlet
#Connect the connecting cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Set mode switch of the AC Adapter/Charger to '''VCR/CAMERA'''
#Press the connecting part of the connecting cord against the back of the HXR in the Battery slot and slide it down
* Use a nearby wall outlet when using the AC Adapter/Charger. '''Disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger from the wall outlet immediately if any malfunction occurs while using the camcorder.
* '''DO NOT''' use the AC Adapter/Charger placed in a narrow space, such as between a wall and furniture.
* '''DO NOT''' short-circuit the DC plug of the AC Adapter/Charger or battery terminal with any metallic objects. This may cause a malfunction.
* '''UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTER''' from the camcorder and wall socket when camcorder is not in use. Even if your camcorder is turned off, AC power is still supplied to it while connected to the wall outlet via the AC Adapter/Charger.
==OPERATING THE MENU==
# Set the '''POWER''' switch to ON
# Press the '''MENU''' button
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the icon of the desired menu is highlighted, then press the dial to select the menu.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired menu item is highlighted, then press the dial to select the item.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired setting is highlighted, the press the dial to select.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen. To return to the previous screen, select '''RETURN'''.
*'''TIP''': You may select menu items with the </> buttons.
**'''NOTE''': The available menu items vary depending on the context of your camcorder during recording or playback.
==MEMORY CARDS==
APS supplies two, 32GB memory cards (installed) when you check out the HXR camcorder. This should provide you with ample recording time, even at the highest quality settings. Should you require additional memory cards for your production, you can use "Memory Stick PRO Duo" media, "Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo" media, SD memory cards and, SDHC memory cards.
* '''Remeber to re-install the memory cards supplied by APS before returning the camera should you choose to use your own media to avoid charges.'''
Before recording, format the memory card(s).
# With the camcorder powered on, press the '''MODE''' button.
# Touch '''MANAGE MEDIA''' setting '''MEDIA FORMAT'''
# Select the recording media to be formatted
# Select YES. The HXR will ask you to verify your selection.
*'''TIP''': The easiest wat to retrieve your files is to make a disk image of the memory card. You can check out a card reader from Media Loan and use the MML or Non-Linear Editing Suites to make your disk image(s). You can then use Final Cut Pro/Adobe Premiere to log and transfer your video for editing.
** '''NOTE''': While [Executing...] is displayed, do not operate the buttons on the camcorder, disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger, or removing recording media from the camcorder. (The access lamp is light or flashing while formatting recording media.)
===NOTES ON RECORDING===
'''Estimated Recording Time on one 32 GB card in minutes with HD Audio Format set to Linear PCM/Dolby Digital:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! AVCHD 24M (FX) !! AVCHD 17M (FH) !! AVCHD 9M (HQ) !! AVCHD 5M (LP)
|-
| 170/180 || 225/235 || 385/435 || 605/750
|}
* When the access lamp is lit or flashing red, the camcorder is writing data on the recording media. Do not remove the battery pack or the AC Adapter/Charger.
* If a movie file exceeds 2GB during recording, the camcorder divides the file and create a new file automatically.
* The menu settings are stored in your camcorder when you turn the '''POWER''' switch to OFF. Do not remove battery pack or AC Adapter/Charger.
==RECORDING==
# Open the shutter of the lens hood.
# Slide the '''POWER''' switch to ON while pressing the green button.
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
To STOP recording, press the record button or the handle record button again.
*'''TIP''': When recording in high definition image quality (HD), the aspect ratio is fixed to 16:9. When recording in standard definition image quality (SD), you can switch the aspect ratio to 4:3.
*'''TIP''': For low angle recording, the handle record button is convenient. Release the '''HOLD''' lever to enable the handle record button. It might be helpful if you set the LCD panel face up or close it after turning it face down, or life the viewfinder up during the low angle recording.
** '''NOTE''': the camcorder will switch from Memory Card A to Memory Card B just before space runs out on Card A (and vice versa). '''Do not eject memory card that is currently being used for recording. Replace only the memory card whose slot lamp is off.
===SELECTING RECORDING QUALITY===
You can set the recording image quality to high definition image quality (HD) or standard definition image quality (SD).
To change the setting:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select HD/SD SET
===SELECTING THE RECORDING FORMAT===
You can select the recording format (bit-rate, image size, frame rate, scanning system). The default setting is HD 1080/60i FX/SD 480/60i HQ.
To change the setting value:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select REC FORMAT
If you select HD 1080/60i FX (the default), movies are recorded with the following format:
* HD - High Definition image quality
* 1080 - Effective scanning lines
* 60 - Frame Rate
* i - Scanning system
* FX - Recording mode
====SETTING DESCRIPTION====
Bit Rate:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! LP
|-
| Max 24 Mbps || Approx 17 Mbps || Approx 9 Mbps || Approx 5 Mbps
|}
Image Size:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! SP
|-
| 1920x1080/1280x720 || 1920x1080/1280x720 || HD recording 1440x1080 SD recording 720x480 || 1440x1080
|}
Frame rate: 24,30 or 60
Scanning system:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! i !! p !! pSCAN
|-
| Interlaced || Progressive || Recording images of progressive scanning as interlace signal (60i)
|}
*For a complete list of setting values, see the complete manual, available on [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf here].
**'''NOTE''': The recording mode is fixed to FX or FH with the progressive scanning system.
**'''NOTE''': When the recording format is changed to or from 720/60p, you will be prompted to reboot the camcorder. Select YES. Otherwise, you cannot switch the recording format.
==ADJUSTING THE ZOOM==
===USING THE POWER ZOOM===
The power zoom lever is pressure sensitive. For a slower zoom use less pressure and for a faster zoom use more pressure.
*'''NOTE''': Be sure to keep your finger on the power zoom lever. If you move your finger off the power zoom lever, the operation sound of the power zoom lever mat also be recorded.
===USING THE HANDLE ZOOM===
* Set the handle zoom switch to VAR or FIX
* Press the handle zoom lever to zoom in or out
When you set the handle zoom switch to VAR, you can zoom in or out at variable speed.
When you set the handle zoom switch to FIX, you can zoom in or out at fixed speed set in HANDLE ZOOM.
You cannot use the handle zoom lever when the handle zoom switch is set to OFF.
===USING THE ZOOM RING===
You can zoom at the desired speed by turning the zoom ring. Fine adjustment is also possible.
Turn the zoom ring at moderate speed. If you turn it too fast, the zoom speed may lag behind the zoom ring rotation speed, or the operation sound of the zoom may also be recorded.
====ADJUSTING THE FOCUS MANUALLY====
# Set the FOCUS switch to MAN
# Rotate the focus ring and adjust the focus.
*'''TIP''': It is easier to focus on the subject when you use the zoom function. Move the power zoom lever towards T (telephoto) to adjust the focus, and then towards W (wide angle) to adjust the zoom/compose your shot recording.
====PUSH AUTO FOCUS====
Record the subject while pressing and holding the PUSH AUTO button. If you release the button, the setting returns to manual focusing. Use this function to shift the focus on one subject to another (Rack Focus). The scenes will shift smoothly.
==ADJUSTING THE IMAGE BRIGHTNESS==
You can adjust the image brightness by adjusting the iris, gain, shutter speed or by reducing the light volume with the ND Filter.
*'''NOTE''': You cannot use the back light function and the spotlight when iris, gain and shutter speed are adjusted manually.
*'''NOTE''': AE SHIFT is not effective temporarily while you adjust the iris, gain, and shutter speed manually.
===ADJUSTING THE IRIS===
You can manually adjust the iris to control the volume of the light entering the lens. By adjusting the iris, you can change or close the aperture of the lens, which is expressed as an F value between F1.6 and F11. The volume of the light increases the more you open the aperture (decreasing F value). The volume of light decreases the more that you close the aperture (increasing F value). The current F value appears on the screen.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''IRIS''' button if "A" is displayed next to current iris value.
# Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
*'''TIP''': The F value becomes close to F3.4 as the zoom position changes from W to T even when you open the aperture by setting the F value low then F3.4, such as F1.6.
*'''TIP''': The range of focus, an important effect of the aperture, is called depth of field. The depth of field gets shallower as the aperture is opened and deeper as the aperture is closed.
===ADJUSTING THE GAIN===
You can adjust the gain manually when you do not want to use the AGC (Automatic Gain Control).
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL'''switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''GAIN''' button if "A" is displayed next to current gain value.
# Set the gain switch to H,M or L. The gain value set for the selected fain switch position appears on the screen. You can set the gain value for each gain switch from [GAIN SET] of the (CAMERA SET) menu.
===ADJUSTING THE SHUTTER SPEED===
You can manually adjust and fix the shutter speed. You can make a moving object look still or emphasize the movement of a moving subject by adjusting the shutter speed.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch
# Press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button until the shutter speed value is highlighted.
# Change the shutter speed displayed on the screen by turning the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can adjust the shutter speed in a range 1/4 second through 1/10000 second. The denominator of the set shutter speed appears on the screen when you set the shutter speed to 1/100 second. The larger the value on the screen, the faster the shutter speed.
# Press the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to lock the shutter speed. To readjust the shutter speed, do steps 2 to 4 again.
===ADJUSTING THE ND FILTER===
You can record the subject clearly by using the ND filter when the recording environment is too bright. The ND filters 1, 2, and 3 reduce the volume of light to about 1/4, 1/16 and 1/64 respectively.
If ND1 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 1. If ND2 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 2. If ND3 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 3. The ND filter indicator will stop flashing and remain on the screen.
If NDOFF flashes set the ND filter to off. The ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': If you change the ND filter to OFF, the ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': When adjusting the iris manually, the ND filter icon does not flash even if the light volume should be adjusted with the ND filter.
*'''NOTE''': If the camcorder cannot detect the ND filter position (OFF/1/2/3), ND flashes on the screen. Make sure that the ND filter is set correctly.
**'''TIP''': While recording a bright subject, diffraction may occur if you close the aperture further down, resulting in a fuzzy focus (this is a common phenomenon with video cameras). The ND filter suppresses this phenomenon and gives better recording results.
===WHITE BALANCE===
You can adjust and fix white balance according to the lighting conditions of recording environment. You can store white balance values in memory A and memory B. Unless a white balance is readjusted, values will remain even after the power has been turned off.
====SETTING WHITE BALANCE====
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button.
# Set the white balance memory switch to '''A''' or '''B'''.
# Capture a white subject, such as white paper, full-screen in the same lighting condition as the subject.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button (one push) WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B starts flashing rapidly. It will stay on when the white balance adjustment is completed and the adjusted value is stored in WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B.
*'''NOTE''': When a white balance adjustment value has not been obtained successfully, WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B turns from rapid flashing to slow flashing. Adjust the subject appropriately and set the shutter speed to auto or around 1/60, the try adjusting white balance again.
===GAIN SET===
you can set gain values for H, M, and L positions of the '''GAIN''' switch. The default settings of [H], [M] and [L] are 18 dB, 9 dB, and 0 dB respectively.
# Press the '''MENU''' button, select CAMERA SET then GAIN SET.
# Select [H], [M] or [L] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Set the gain value with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial, then press the dial. You can select the value between -6 dB and -21 dB by 3 dB. The larger the value, the higher the gain.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen.
====SMOOTH GAIN====
You can set the transition speed at which the gain setting shifts from one value to another, set for the '''GAIN''' switch positions, when you switch the '''GAIN''' switch from a position to another. You can select the transition speed from [FAST], [MIDDLE] and [SLOW] or set to [OFF]. The default setting is [OFF].
====ZEBRA STRIPING====
You can display a zebra pattern as a guide for adjusting brightness. Zebra stripes are the only real indication of lighting levels. The Zebra pattern is a stripe pattern displayed where the image will be overexposed over a certain level and detail will be lost.
You can select the brightness level between 70 and 100 or 100+. The default setting is [70]. 70 or 80 are good Luma values for Caucasian tones. 100 IRE is the upper limit of legal video and is the correct value of white.
# Press the '''MENU''' button.
# Select DISPLAY SET with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select ZEBRA with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select the appropriate level.
*'''NOTE''': When you select [ON], the Zebra icon (a square with diagonal lines) and the brightness level appear on the screen. The zebra pattern will not be recorded with the image. the default setting is [OFF].
==AUDIO SETUP==
===CHANNEL SETTING===
# Select input with the '''CH1''' (INT MIC/INPUT 1) switch and the '''CH2''' (INT MIC/INPUT1/INPUT2).
# Set '''INPUT1''' to an appropriate position for the microphone connected to the INPUT1 jack.
* LINE: For inputting sound from an audio device.
* MIC: For inputting sound from an external microphone that does not support the +48V power source (phantom power).
* MIC+48V: For inputting sound from a device that supports the +48v power source, including the supplied microphone.
When you connect a microphone to the INPUT2 jack, set the INPUT2 switch to an appropriate position for that microphone.
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INT MIC'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH POSITION !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (L) || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (R) || CH2*)
|-
| INPUT1 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2
|}
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INPUT1'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2**
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT2 || CH2**
|}
* The recording level of channel 2 is synchronized with that of channel 1 when only the internal microphone is used. The recording level of channel 2 is controlled with '''CH1''' (AUDIO LEVEL) dial and the '''CH1''' (AUTO/MAN) switch.
** You can adjust the recording levels of channel 1 and channel 2 separately.
*'''NOTE''': Do not operate the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches during recording to prevent noise from being recorded.
*'''NOTE''': When you connect a device that supports the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches to MIC+48v prior to connecting the device. When you disconnect the device, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switch to MIC first, then disconnect it.
*'''NOTE''': When you connect a microphone that does not support the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' to MIC. If you use it with the INPUT1/INPUT2 switch set to MIC+48V, it may damage or the recorded sound be distorted.
===ADJUSTING THE VOLUME===
You can adjust the volume of an internal microphone or a microphone connected to the INPUT1/INPUT2 jack.
# Set '''AUTO/MAN''' (CH1/CH2) switch of the channel to be adjust to MAN.
# Turn the '''AUDIO LEVEL''' dial to adjust the volume during recording or standby.
===SETTING THE HEADPHONE SOUND===
You can select the channel, CH1 or Ch2, to output from the headphone. You can select the channel, Ch1 or CH2 or Stereo Mix, to output from the headphone.
==TIME CODE and USER BIT==
The camcorder records movies accompanied by time data, such as time code and user bit. Display the setting screen by pressing the '''MENU''' and select (TC/UB SET) with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
You can synchronize the time code of this camcorder with the time code of another camcorder. See pages 44-45 of the complete manual ([http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf available here]) for instructions.
===PRESETTING THE TIME CODE===
# Select [TC PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select [PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select the first 2 digits with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can set the time code between 00:00:00:00 and 23:59:59:29.
# Set other digits by repeating step 3.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
===TO RESET THE TIME CODE===
You can reset the time code (00:00:00:00). Select [RESET] in step 2 of "PRESETTING THE TIME CODE."
===PRESETTING THE USER BIT===
# Select [UB PRESET] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select [PRESET] with the '''SE:/PRESET EXEC''' dial.
# Select the first 2 digits with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Set other digits by repeating step 3.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
===TO RESET THE USER BIT===
You can reset the user bit (00 00 00 00) Select [RESET in step 2 of "PRESETTING THE USER BIT."
==PLAYBACK==
Press the '''VISUAL INDEX''' button or the '''MODE''' button followed by touching '''PLAY''' then [VISUAL INDEX] on the screen. To play back movies, touch recording media you want to play back. Touch the playback mode and select the desired image quality of movies. Touch the thumbnail of the movie you want to play twice.
[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-04-02T17:38:24Z

Kisaar24: /* CHANNEL SETTING */

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-04-02T17:37:53Z

Kisaar24: /* CHANNEL SETTING */

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/aps_SonyHXR.pdf Sony HXR Operating Guide - PDF] 
[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf Sony HXR Complete Manual - PDF] 

[http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/2014/03/27/sony-hxr-nx5u-nxcam/ Video Tutorials]

==INTRODUCTION==
The Sony HXR-NX5U is a prosumer HD camcorder that records to memory cards utilizing the AVCHD format. This camcorder provides high quality, long duration recording with dual memory card slots, state-of-the-art G lens and 3 CMOS sensors. As with all Media Loan Equipment, '''''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE''''' for the HXR and all accessories when you check this camera out from APS.

==PRECAUTIONS==
*'''DO NOT HOLD THE CAMCORDER BY THE:'''
:::LENS HOOD
:::LCD PANEL
:::INTERNAL MICROPHONE
:::MICROPHONE OR MICROPHONE HOLDER
:::VIEWFINDER
*'''PROTECT THE HXR FROM WATER AND SOURCES OF MOISTURE OR SALT WATER/SPRAY. THE CAMERA IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE BATTERY PACK TO WATER. THE BATTERY PACK IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT SHAKE, KNOCK, DROP OR SUBJECT THE HXR TO EXCESSICE SHOCK. (NO BIKE DOLLIES!)'''
 
*'''CONNECT CANLES TO THE CAMCORDER WITH THEIR TERMINALS PLACED THE CORRECT WAY. SQUEEZING THE TERMINALS INTO THE HXR JACKS MAY DAMAGE THEM OR RESULT IN A MALFUNCTION OF THE CAMCORDER'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE CAMCORDER'S VIEWFINDER, LENS, LCD SCREEN TO THE SUN OR STRONG LIGHT SOURCE FOR EXTENDED PERIODS. INTENSE LIGHT SOURCES, ESPECIALLY THE SUN, WILL CONVERGE ON THE VIEWFINDER OR LENS AND DAMAGE THE INTERNAL PARTS OF THE CAMCORDER.'''
 
*'''ALWAYS CLOSE THE LENS COVER AND STORE IN CASE WHEN NOT IN USE'''
 
*'''DO NOT APPLY ANY LIQUID (CLEANING OR OTHERWISE) DIRECTLY TO THE LCD SCREEN'''
 
*'''IF THE CAMCORDER IS BROUGHT FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, MOISTURE MAY CONDENSE INSIDE THE CAMCORDER AND CAUSE A MALFUNCTION. WHEN YOU BRING THE HXR FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, PUT CAMCORDER IN A PLASTIC BAG AND SEAL IT TIGHTLY. REMOVE THE BAD WHEN THE AIR TEMPERATURE INSIDE THE PLASTIC BAG HAS REACHED AMBIENT TEMPERATURE(AFTER 1 HOUR)

==SUPPLYING POWER TO THE HXR==
===CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK===
APS provides two Lithium battery packs when you check out the HXR. Use the supplied AC Adapter/Charger to charge these batteries before use.
# Set the mode switch to charge
# Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
# Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
# Place the battery pack in the slot of the AC Adapter/Charger, press down, and slide battery until the charge lamp turns on and charging starts.
When the battery pack reaches a normal charge, the charge lamp turns off. You can continue to charge the battery pack for an additional hour for a full charge, which lets you use the battery a little longer. Remove the battery pack from the AC Adapter/Charger when the charge is completed.
===ATTACHING/REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK===
To attach the battery pack, press the battery against the back of the camcorder and slide it down.
 
To remove the battery pack, slide the '''POWER''' switch to '''OFF'''. Push the '''BAT RELEASE''' button and remove the battery pack.
===AC ADAPTER/CHARGER===
#Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Connect the power cord to the wall outlet
#Connect the connecting cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Set mode switch of the AC Adapter/Charger to '''VCR/CAMERA'''
#Press the connecting part of the connecting cord against the back of the HXR in the Battery slot and slide it down
* Use a nearby wall outlet when using the AC Adapter/Charger. '''Disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger from the wall outlet immediately if any malfunction occurs while using the camcorder.
* '''DO NOT''' use the AC Adapter/Charger placed in a narrow space, such as between a wall and furniture.
* '''DO NOT''' short-circuit the DC plug of the AC Adapter/Charger or battery terminal with any metallic objects. This may cause a malfunction.
* '''UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTER''' from the camcorder and wall socket when camcorder is not in use. Even if your camcorder is turned off, AC power is still supplied to it while connected to the wall outlet via the AC Adapter/Charger.
==OPERATING THE MENU==
# Set the '''POWER''' switch to ON
# Press the '''MENU''' button
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the icon of the desired menu is highlighted, then press the dial to select the menu.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired menu item is highlighted, then press the dial to select the item.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired setting is highlighted, the press the dial to select.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen. To return to the previous screen, select '''RETURN'''.
*'''TIP''': You may select menu items with the </> buttons.
**'''NOTE''': The available menu items vary depending on the context of your camcorder during recording or playback.
==MEMORY CARDS==
APS supplies two, 32GB memory cards (installed) when you check out the HXR camcorder. This should provide you with ample recording time, even at the highest quality settings. Should you require additional memory cards for your production, you can use "Memory Stick PRO Duo" media, "Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo" media, SD memory cards and, SDHC memory cards.
* '''Remeber to re-install the memory cards supplied by APS before returning the camera should you choose to use your own media to avoid charges.'''
Before recording, format the memory card(s).
# With the camcorder powered on, press the '''MODE''' button.
# Touch '''MANAGE MEDIA''' setting '''MEDIA FORMAT'''
# Select the recording media to be formatted
# Select YES. The HXR will ask you to verify your selection.
*'''TIP''': The easiest wat to retrieve your files is to make a disk image of the memory card. You can check out a card reader from Media Loan and use the MML or Non-Linear Editing Suites to make your disk image(s). You can then use Final Cut Pro/Adobe Premiere to log and transfer your video for editing.
** '''NOTE''': While [Executing...] is displayed, do not operate the buttons on the camcorder, disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger, or removing recording media from the camcorder. (The access lamp is light or flashing while formatting recording media.)
===NOTES ON RECORDING===
'''Estimated Recording Time on one 32 GB card in minutes with HD Audio Format set to Linear PCM/Dolby Digital:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! AVCHD 24M (FX) !! AVCHD 17M (FH) !! AVCHD 9M (HQ) !! AVCHD 5M (LP)
|-
| 170/180 || 225/235 || 385/435 || 605/750
|}
* When the access lamp is lit or flashing red, the camcorder is writing data on the recording media. Do not remove the battery pack or the AC Adapter/Charger.
* If a movie file exceeds 2GB during recording, the camcorder divides the file and create a new file automatically.
* The menu settings are stored in your camcorder when you turn the '''POWER''' switch to OFF. Do not remove battery pack or AC Adapter/Charger.
==RECORDING==
# Open the shutter of the lens hood.
# Slide the '''POWER''' switch to ON while pressing the green button.
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
To STOP recording, press the record button or the handle record button again.
*'''TIP''': When recording in high definition image quality (HD), the aspect ratio is fixed to 16:9. When recording in standard definition image quality (SD), you can switch the aspect ratio to 4:3.
*'''TIP''': For low angle recording, the handle record button is convenient. Release the '''HOLD''' lever to enable the handle record button. It might be helpful if you set the LCD panel face up or close it after turning it face down, or life the viewfinder up during the low angle recording.
** '''NOTE''': the camcorder will switch from Memory Card A to Memory Card B just before space runs out on Card A (and vice versa). '''Do not eject memory card that is currently being used for recording. Replace only the memory card whose slot lamp is off.
===SELECTING RECORDING QUALITY===
You can set the recording image quality to high definition image quality (HD) or standard definition image quality (SD).
To change the setting:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select HD/SD SET
===SELECTING THE RECORDING FORMAT===
You can select the recording format (bit-rate, image size, frame rate, scanning system). The default setting is HD 1080/60i FX/SD 480/60i HQ.
To change the setting value:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select REC FORMAT
If you select HD 1080/60i FX (the default), movies are recorded with the following format:
* HD - High Definition image quality
* 1080 - Effective scanning lines
* 60 - Frame Rate
* i - Scanning system
* FX - Recording mode
====SETTING DESCRIPTION====
Bit Rate:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! LP
|-
| Max 24 Mbps || Approx 17 Mbps || Approx 9 Mbps || Approx 5 Mbps
|}
Image Size:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! SP
|-
| 1920x1080/1280x720 || 1920x1080/1280x720 || HD recording 1440x1080 SD recording 720x480 || 1440x1080
|}
Frame rate: 24,30 or 60
Scanning system:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! i !! p !! pSCAN
|-
| Interlaced || Progressive || Recording images of progressive scanning as interlace signal (60i)
|}
*For a complete list of setting values, see the complete manual, available on [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf here].
**'''NOTE''': The recording mode is fixed to FX or FH with the progressive scanning system.
**'''NOTE''': When the recording format is changed to or from 720/60p, you will be prompted to reboot the camcorder. Select YES. Otherwise, you cannot switch the recording format.
==ADJUSTING THE ZOOM==
===USING THE POWER ZOOM===
The power zoom lever is pressure sensitive. For a slower zoom use less pressure and for a faster zoom use more pressure.
*'''NOTE''': Be sure to keep your finger on the power zoom lever. If you move your finger off the power zoom lever, the operation sound of the power zoom lever mat also be recorded.
===USING THE HANDLE ZOOM===
* Set the handle zoom switch to VAR or FIX
* Press the handle zoom lever to zoom in or out
When you set the handle zoom switch to VAR, you can zoom in or out at variable speed.
When you set the handle zoom switch to FIX, you can zoom in or out at fixed speed set in HANDLE ZOOM.
You cannot use the handle zoom lever when the handle zoom switch is set to OFF.
===USING THE ZOOM RING===
You can zoom at the desired speed by turning the zoom ring. Fine adjustment is also possible.
Turn the zoom ring at moderate speed. If you turn it too fast, the zoom speed may lag behind the zoom ring rotation speed, or the operation sound of the zoom may also be recorded.
====ADJUSTING THE FOCUS MANUALLY====
# Set the FOCUS switch to MAN
# Rotate the focus ring and adjust the focus.
*'''TIP''': It is easier to focus on the subject when you use the zoom function. Move the power zoom lever towards T (telephoto) to adjust the focus, and then towards W (wide angle) to adjust the zoom/compose your shot recording.
====PUSH AUTO FOCUS====
Record the subject while pressing and holding the PUSH AUTO button. If you release the button, the setting returns to manual focusing. Use this function to shift the focus on one subject to another (Rack Focus). The scenes will shift smoothly.
==ADJUSTING THE IMAGE BRIGHTNESS==
You can adjust the image brightness by adjusting the iris, gain, shutter speed or by reducing the light volume with the ND Filter.
*'''NOTE''': You cannot use the back light function and the spotlight when iris, gain and shutter speed are adjusted manually.
*'''NOTE''': AE SHIFT is not effective temporarily while you adjust the iris, gain, and shutter speed manually.
===ADJUSTING THE IRIS===
You can manually adjust the iris to control the volume of the light entering the lens. By adjusting the iris, you can change or close the aperture of the lens, which is expressed as an F value between F1.6 and F11. The volume of the light increases the more you open the aperture (decreasing F value). The volume of light decreases the more that you close the aperture (increasing F value). The current F value appears on the screen.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''IRIS''' button if "A" is displayed next to current iris value.
# Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
*'''TIP''': The F value becomes close to F3.4 as the zoom position changes from W to T even when you open the aperture by setting the F value low then F3.4, such as F1.6.
*'''TIP''': The range of focus, an important effect of the aperture, is called depth of field. The depth of field gets shallower as the aperture is opened and deeper as the aperture is closed.
===ADJUSTING THE GAIN===
You can adjust the gain manually when you do not want to use the AGC (Automatic Gain Control).
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL'''switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''GAIN''' button if "A" is displayed next to current gain value.
# Set the gain switch to H,M or L. The gain value set for the selected fain switch position appears on the screen. You can set the gain value for each gain switch from [GAIN SET] of the (CAMERA SET) menu.
===ADJUSTING THE SHUTTER SPEED===
You can manually adjust and fix the shutter speed. You can make a moving object look still or emphasize the movement of a moving subject by adjusting the shutter speed.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch
# Press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button until the shutter speed value is highlighted.
# Change the shutter speed displayed on the screen by turning the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can adjust the shutter speed in a range 1/4 second through 1/10000 second. The denominator of the set shutter speed appears on the screen when you set the shutter speed to 1/100 second. The larger the value on the screen, the faster the shutter speed.
# Press the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to lock the shutter speed. To readjust the shutter speed, do steps 2 to 4 again.
===ADJUSTING THE ND FILTER===
You can record the subject clearly by using the ND filter when the recording environment is too bright. The ND filters 1, 2, and 3 reduce the volume of light to about 1/4, 1/16 and 1/64 respectively.
If ND1 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 1. If ND2 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 2. If ND3 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 3. The ND filter indicator will stop flashing and remain on the screen.
If NDOFF flashes set the ND filter to off. The ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': If you change the ND filter to OFF, the ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': When adjusting the iris manually, the ND filter icon does not flash even if the light volume should be adjusted with the ND filter.
*'''NOTE''': If the camcorder cannot detect the ND filter position (OFF/1/2/3), ND flashes on the screen. Make sure that the ND filter is set correctly.
**'''TIP''': While recording a bright subject, diffraction may occur if you close the aperture further down, resulting in a fuzzy focus (this is a common phenomenon with video cameras). The ND filter suppresses this phenomenon and gives better recording results.
===WHITE BALANCE===
You can adjust and fix white balance according to the lighting conditions of recording environment. You can store white balance values in memory A and memory B. Unless a white balance is readjusted, values will remain even after the power has been turned off.
====SETTING WHITE BALANCE====
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button.
# Set the white balance memory switch to '''A''' or '''B'''.
# Capture a white subject, such as white paper, full-screen in the same lighting condition as the subject.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button (one push) WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B starts flashing rapidly. It will stay on when the white balance adjustment is completed and the adjusted value is stored in WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B.
*'''NOTE''': When a white balance adjustment value has not been obtained successfully, WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B turns from rapid flashing to slow flashing. Adjust the subject appropriately and set the shutter speed to auto or around 1/60, the try adjusting white balance again.
===GAIN SET===
you can set gain values for H, M, and L positions of the '''GAIN''' switch. The default settings of [H], [M] and [L] are 18 dB, 9 dB, and 0 dB respectively.
# Press the '''MENU''' button, select CAMERA SET then GAIN SET.
# Select [H], [M] or [L] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Set the gain value with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial, then press the dial. You can select the value between -6 dB and -21 dB by 3 dB. The larger the value, the higher the gain.
# Select [OK] with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen.
====SMOOTH GAIN====
You can set the transition speed at which the gain setting shifts from one value to another, set for the '''GAIN''' switch positions, when you switch the '''GAIN''' switch from a position to another. You can select the transition speed from [FAST], [MIDDLE] and [SLOW] or set to [OFF]. The default setting is [OFF].
====ZEBRA STRIPING====
You can display a zebra pattern as a guide for adjusting brightness. Zebra stripes are the only real indication of lighting levels. The Zebra pattern is a stripe pattern displayed where the image will be overexposed over a certain level and detail will be lost.
You can select the brightness level between 70 and 100 or 100+. The default setting is [70]. 70 or 80 are good Luma values for Caucasian tones. 100 IRE is the upper limit of legal video and is the correct value of white.
# Press the '''MENU''' button.
# Select DISPLAY SET with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select ZEBRA with the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial.
# Select the appropriate level.
*'''NOTE''': When you select [ON], the Zebra icon (a square with diagonal lines) and the brightness level appear on the screen. The zebra pattern will not be recorded with the image. the default setting is [OFF].
==AUDIO SETUP==
===CHANNEL SETTING===
# Select input with the '''CH1''' (INT MIC/INPUT 1) switch and the '''CH2''' (INT MIC/INPUT1/INPUT2).
# Set '''INPUT1''' to an appropriate position for the microphone connected to the INPUT1 jack.
* LINE: For inputting sound from an audio device.
* MIC: For inputting sound from an external microphone that does not support the +48V power source (phantom power).
* MIC+48V: For inputting sound from a device that supports the +48v power source, including the supplied microphone.
When you connect a microphone to the INPUT2 jack, set the INPUT2 switch to an appropriate position for that microphone.
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INT MIC'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH POSITION !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (L) || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (R) || CH2*)
|-
| INPUT1 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2
|}
'''WHEN THE CH1 SWITCH IS SET TO INPUT1'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! CH2 SWITCH !! INPUT CHANNEL !! SOURCE
|-
| INT MIC || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INT MIC || Internal microphone (mono) || CH2**
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT1 || XLR INPUT1 || CH2**
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT1 || CH1
|-
| INPUT2 || XLR INPUT2 || CH2**
|}
* * The recording level of channel 2 is synchronized with that of channel 1 when only the internal microphone is used. The recording level of channel 2 is controlled with '''CH1''' (AUDIO LEVEL) dial and the '''CH1''' (AUTO/MAN) switch.
* ** You can adjust the recording levels of channel 1 and channel 2 separately.
**'''NOTE''': Do not operate the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches during recording to prevent noise from being recorded.
**'''NOTE''': When you connect a device that supports the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switches to MIC+48v prior to connecting the device. When you disconnect the device, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' switch to MIC first, then disconnect it.
**'''NOTE''': When you connect a microphone that does not support the +48V power source to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the '''INPUT1/INPUT2''' to MIC. If you use it with the INPUT1/INPUT2 switch set to MIC+48V, it may damage or the recorded sound be distorted.
[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-04-02T15:53:08Z

Kisaar24: /* GAIN SET */

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-04-02T15:21:15Z

Kisaar24: /* ADJUSTING THE IMAGE BRIGHTNESS */

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-04-02T15:20:47Z

Kisaar24: /* INTRODUCTION */

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/aps_SonyHXR.pdf Sony HXR Operating Guide - PDF] 
[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf Sony HXR Complete Manual - PDF] 

[http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/2014/03/27/sony-hxr-nx5u-nxcam/ Video Tutorials]

==INTRODUCTION==
The Sony HXR-NX5U is a prosumer HD camcorder that records to memory cards utilizing the AVCHD format. This camcorder provides high quality, long duration recording with dual memory card slots, state-of-the-art G lens and 3 CMOS sensors. As with all Media Loan Equipment, '''''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE''''' for the HXR and all accessories when you check this camera out from APS.

==PRECAUTIONS==
*'''DO NOT HOLD THE CAMCORDER BY THE:'''
:::LENS HOOD
:::LCD PANEL
:::INTERNAL MICROPHONE
:::MICROPHONE OR MICROPHONE HOLDER
:::VIEWFINDER
*'''PROTECT THE HXR FROM WATER AND SOURCES OF MOISTURE OR SALT WATER/SPRAY. THE CAMERA IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE BATTERY PACK TO WATER. THE BATTERY PACK IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT SHAKE, KNOCK, DROP OR SUBJECT THE HXR TO EXCESSICE SHOCK. (NO BIKE DOLLIES!)'''
 
*'''CONNECT CANLES TO THE CAMCORDER WITH THEIR TERMINALS PLACED THE CORRECT WAY. SQUEEZING THE TERMINALS INTO THE HXR JACKS MAY DAMAGE THEM OR RESULT IN A MALFUNCTION OF THE CAMCORDER'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE CAMCORDER'S VIEWFINDER, LENS, LCD SCREEN TO THE SUN OR STRONG LIGHT SOURCE FOR EXTENDED PERIODS. INTENSE LIGHT SOURCES, ESPECIALLY THE SUN, WILL CONVERGE ON THE VIEWFINDER OR LENS AND DAMAGE THE INTERNAL PARTS OF THE CAMCORDER.'''
 
*'''ALWAYS CLOSE THE LENS COVER AND STORE IN CASE WHEN NOT IN USE'''
 
*'''DO NOT APPLY ANY LIQUID (CLEANING OR OTHERWISE) DIRECTLY TO THE LCD SCREEN'''
 
*'''IF THE CAMCORDER IS BROUGHT FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, MOISTURE MAY CONDENSE INSIDE THE CAMCORDER AND CAUSE A MALFUNCTION. WHEN YOU BRING THE HXR FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, PUT CAMCORDER IN A PLASTIC BAG AND SEAL IT TIGHTLY. REMOVE THE BAD WHEN THE AIR TEMPERATURE INSIDE THE PLASTIC BAG HAS REACHED AMBIENT TEMPERATURE(AFTER 1 HOUR)

==SUPPLYING POWER TO THE HXR==
===CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK===
APS provides two Lithium battery packs when you check out the HXR. Use the supplied AC Adapter/Charger to charge these batteries before use.
# Set the mode switch to charge
# Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
# Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
# Place the battery pack in the slot of the AC Adapter/Charger, press down, and slide battery until the charge lamp turns on and charging starts.
When the battery pack reaches a normal charge, the charge lamp turns off. You can continue to charge the battery pack for an additional hour for a full charge, which lets you use the battery a little longer. Remove the battery pack from the AC Adapter/Charger when the charge is completed.
===ATTACHING/REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK===
To attach the battery pack, press the battery against the back of the camcorder and slide it down.
 
To remove the battery pack, slide the '''POWER''' switch to '''OFF'''. Push the '''BAT RELEASE''' button and remove the battery pack.
===AC ADAPTER/CHARGER===
#Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Connect the power cord to the wall outlet
#Connect the connecting cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Set mode switch of the AC Adapter/Charger to '''VCR/CAMERA'''
#Press the connecting part of the connecting cord against the back of the HXR in the Battery slot and slide it down
* Use a nearby wall outlet when using the AC Adapter/Charger. '''Disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger from the wall outlet immediately if any malfunction occurs while using the camcorder.
* '''DO NOT''' use the AC Adapter/Charger placed in a narrow space, such as between a wall and furniture.
* '''DO NOT''' short-circuit the DC plug of the AC Adapter/Charger or battery terminal with any metallic objects. This may cause a malfunction.
* '''UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTER''' from the camcorder and wall socket when camcorder is not in use. Even if your camcorder is turned off, AC power is still supplied to it while connected to the wall outlet via the AC Adapter/Charger.
==OPERATING THE MENU==
# Set the '''POWER''' switch to ON
# Press the '''MENU''' button
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the icon of the desired menu is highlighted, then press the dial to select the menu.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired menu item is highlighted, then press the dial to select the item.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired setting is highlighted, the press the dial to select.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen. To return to the previous screen, select '''RETURN'''.
*'''TIP''': You may select menu items with the </> buttons.
**'''NOTE''': The available menu items vary depending on the context of your camcorder during recording or playback.
==MEMORY CARDS==
APS supplies two, 32GB memory cards (installed) when you check out the HXR camcorder. This should provide you with ample recording time, even at the highest quality settings. Should you require additional memory cards for your production, you can use "Memory Stick PRO Duo" media, "Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo" media, SD memory cards and, SDHC memory cards.
* '''Remeber to re-install the memory cards supplied by APS before returning the camera should you choose to use your own media to avoid charges.'''
Before recording, format the memory card(s).
# With the camcorder powered on, press the '''MODE''' button.
# Touch '''MANAGE MEDIA''' setting '''MEDIA FORMAT'''
# Select the recording media to be formatted
# Select YES. The HXR will ask you to verify your selection.
*'''TIP''': The easiest wat to retrieve your files is to make a disk image of the memory card. You can check out a card reader from Media Loan and use the MML or Non-Linear Editing Suites to make your disk image(s). You can then use Final Cut Pro/Adobe Premiere to log and transfer your video for editing.
** '''NOTE''': While [Executing...] is displayed, do not operate the buttons on the camcorder, disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger, or removing recording media from the camcorder. (The access lamp is light or flashing while formatting recording media.)
===NOTES ON RECORDING===
'''Estimated Recording Time on one 32 GB card in minutes with HD Audio Format set to Linear PCM/Dolby Digital:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! AVCHD 24M (FX) !! AVCHD 17M (FH) !! AVCHD 9M (HQ) !! AVCHD 5M (LP)
|-
| 170/180 || 225/235 || 385/435 || 605/750
|}
* When the access lamp is lit or flashing red, the camcorder is writing data on the recording media. Do not remove the battery pack or the AC Adapter/Charger.
* If a movie file exceeds 2GB during recording, the camcorder divides the file and create a new file automatically.
* The menu settings are stored in your camcorder when you turn the '''POWER''' switch to OFF. Do not remove battery pack or AC Adapter/Charger.
==RECORDING==
# Open the shutter of the lens hood.
# Slide the '''POWER''' switch to ON while pressing the green button.
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
To STOP recording, press the record button or the handle record button again.
*'''TIP''': When recording in high definition image quality (HD), the aspect ratio is fixed to 16:9. When recording in standard definition image quality (SD), you can switch the aspect ratio to 4:3.
*'''TIP''': For low angle recording, the handle record button is convenient. Release the '''HOLD''' lever to enable the handle record button. It might be helpful if you set the LCD panel face up or close it after turning it face down, or life the viewfinder up during the low angle recording.
** '''NOTE''': the camcorder will switch from Memory Card A to Memory Card B just before space runs out on Card A (and vice versa). '''Do not eject memory card that is currently being used for recording. Replace only the memory card whose slot lamp is off.
===SELECTING RECORDING QUALITY===
You can set the recording image quality to high definition image quality (HD) or standard definition image quality (SD).
To change the setting:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select HD/SD SET
===SELECTING THE RECORDING FORMAT===
You can select the recording format (bit-rate, image size, frame rate, scanning system). The default setting is HD 1080/60i FX/SD 480/60i HQ.
To change the setting value:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select REC FORMAT
If you select HD 1080/60i FX (the default), movies are recorded with the following format:
* HD - High Definition image quality
* 1080 - Effective scanning lines
* 60 - Frame Rate
* i - Scanning system
* FX - Recording mode
====SETTING DESCRIPTION====
Bit Rate:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! LP
|-
| Max 24 Mbps || Approx 17 Mbps || Approx 9 Mbps || Approx 5 Mbps
|}
Image Size:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! SP
|-
| 1920x1080/1280x720 || 1920x1080/1280x720 || HD recording 1440x1080 SD recording 720x480 || 1440x1080
|}
Frame rate: 24,30 or 60
Scanning system:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! i !! p !! pSCAN
|-
| Interlaced || Progressive || Recording images of progressive scanning as interlace signal (60i)
|}
*For a complete list of setting values, see the complete manual, available on [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf here].
**'''NOTE''': The recording mode is fixed to FX or FH with the progressive scanning system.
**'''NOTE''': When the recording format is changed to or from 720/60p, you will be prompted to reboot the camcorder. Select YES. Otherwise, you cannot switch the recording format.
==ADJUSTING THE ZOOM==
===USING THE POWER ZOOM===
The power zoom lever is pressure sensitive. For a slower zoom use less pressure and for a faster zoom use more pressure.
*'''NOTE''': Be sure to keep your finger on the power zoom lever. If you move your finger off the power zoom lever, the operation sound of the power zoom lever mat also be recorded.
===USING THE HANDLE ZOOM===
* Set the handle zoom switch to VAR or FIX
* Press the handle zoom lever to zoom in or out
When you set the handle zoom switch to VAR, you can zoom in or out at variable speed.
When you set the handle zoom switch to FIX, you can zoom in or out at fixed speed set in HANDLE ZOOM.
You cannot use the handle zoom lever when the handle zoom switch is set to OFF.
===USING THE ZOOM RING===
You can zoom at the desired speed by turning the zoom ring. Fine adjustment is also possible.
Turn the zoom ring at moderate speed. If you turn it too fast, the zoom speed may lag behind the zoom ring rotation speed, or the operation sound of the zoom may also be recorded.
====ADJUSTING THE FOCUS MANUALLY====
# Set the FOCUS switch to MAN
# Rotate the focus ring and adjust the focus.
*'''TIP''': It is easier to focus on the subject when you use the zoom function. Move the power zoom lever towards T (telephoto) to adjust the focus, and then towards W (wide angle) to adjust the zoom/compose your shot recording.
====PUSH AUTO FOCUS====
Record the subject while pressing and holding the PUSH AUTO button. If you release the button, the setting returns to manual focusing. Use this function to shift the focus on one subject to another (Rack Focus). The scenes will shift smoothly.
==ADJUSTING THE IMAGE BRIGHTNESS==
You can adjust the image brightness by adjusting the iris, gain, shutter speed or by reducing the light volume with the ND Filter.
*'''NOTE''': You cannot use the back light function and the spotlight when iris, gain and shutter speed are adjusted manually.
*'''NOTE''': AE SHIFT si not effective temporarily while you adjust the iris, gain, and shutter speed manually.
===ADJUSTING THE IRIS===
You can manually adjust the iris to control the volume of the light entering the lens. By adjusting the iris, you can change or close the aperture of the lens, which is expressed as an F value between F1.6 and F11. The volume of the light increases the more you open the aperture (decreasing F value). The volume of light decreases the more that you close the aperture (increasing F value). The current F value appears on the screen.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''IRIS''' button if "A" is displayed next to current iris value.
# Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
*'''TIP''': The F value becomes close to F3.4 as the zoom position changes from W to T even when you open the aperture by setting the F value low then F3.4, such as F1.6.
*'''TIP''': The range of focus, an important effect of the aperture, is called depth of field. The depth of field gets shallower as the aperture is opened and deeper as the aperture is closed.
===ADJUSTING THE GAIN===
You can adjust the gain manually when you do not want to use the AGC (Automatic Gain Control).
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL'''switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''GAIN''' button if "A" is displayed next to current gain value.
# Set the gain switch to H,M or L. The gain value set for the selected fain switch position appears on the screen. You can set the gain value for each gain switch from [GAIN SET] of the (CAMERA SET) menu.
===ADJUSTING THE SHUTTER SPEED===
You can manually adjust and fix the shutter speed. You can make a moving object look still or emphasize the movement of a moving subject by adjusting the shutter speed.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch
# Press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button until the shutter speed value is highlighted.
# Change the shutter speed displayed on the screen by turning the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can adjust the shutter speed in a range 1/4 second through 1/10000 second. The denominator of the set shutter speed appears on the screen when you set the shutter speed to 1/100 second. The larger the value on the screen, the faster the shutter speed.
# Press the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to lock the shutter speed. To readjust the shutter speed, do steps 2 to 4 again.
===ADJUSTING THE ND FILTER===
You can record the subject clearly by using the ND filter when the recording environment is too bright. The ND filters 1, 2, and 3 reduce the volume of light to about 1/4, 1/16 and 1/64 respectively.
If ND1 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 1. If ND2 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 2. If ND3 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 3. The ND filter indicator will stop flashing and remain on the screen.
If NDOFF flashes set the ND filter to off. The ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': If you change the ND filter to OFF, the ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': When adjusting the iris manually, the ND filter icon does not flash even if the light volume should be adjusted with the ND filter.
*'''NOTE''': If the camcorder cannot detect the ND filter position (OFF/1/2/3), ND flashes on the screen. Make sure that the ND filter is set correctly.
**'''TIP''': While recording a bright subject, diffraction may occur if you close the aperture further down, resulting in a fuzzy focus (this is a common phenomenon with video cameras). The ND filter suppresses this phenomenon and gives better recording results.
===WHITE BALANCE===
You can adjust and fix white balance according to the lighting conditions of recording environment. You can store white balance values in memory A and memory B. Unless a white balance is readjusted, values will remain even after the power has been turned off.
====SETTING WHITE BALANCE====
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button.
# Set the white balance memory switch to '''A''' or '''B'''.
# Capture a white subject, such as white paper, full-screen in the same lighting condition as the subject.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button (one push) WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B starts flashing rapidly. It will stay on when the white balance adjustment is completed and the adjusted value is stored in WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B.
*'''NOTE''': When a white balance adjustment value has not been obtained successfully, WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B turns from rapid flashing to slow flashing. Adjust the subject appropriately and set the shutter speed to auto or around 1/60, the try adjusting white balance again.
===GAIN SET===

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-04-02T15:20:28Z

Kisaar24: /* Precautions */

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/aps_SonyHXR.pdf Sony HXR Operating Guide - PDF] 
[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf Sony HXR Complete Manual - PDF] 

[http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/2014/03/27/sony-hxr-nx5u-nxcam/ Video Tutorials]

=='''INTRODUCTION''' ==
The Sony HXR-NX5U is a prosumer HD camcorder that records to memory cards utilizing the AVCHD format. This camcorder provides high quality, long duration recording with dual memory card slots, state-of-the-art G lens and 3 CMOS sensors. As with all Media Loan Equipment, '''''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE''''' for the HXR and all accessories when you check this camera out from APS.

==PRECAUTIONS==
*'''DO NOT HOLD THE CAMCORDER BY THE:'''
:::LENS HOOD
:::LCD PANEL
:::INTERNAL MICROPHONE
:::MICROPHONE OR MICROPHONE HOLDER
:::VIEWFINDER
*'''PROTECT THE HXR FROM WATER AND SOURCES OF MOISTURE OR SALT WATER/SPRAY. THE CAMERA IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE BATTERY PACK TO WATER. THE BATTERY PACK IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT SHAKE, KNOCK, DROP OR SUBJECT THE HXR TO EXCESSICE SHOCK. (NO BIKE DOLLIES!)'''
 
*'''CONNECT CANLES TO THE CAMCORDER WITH THEIR TERMINALS PLACED THE CORRECT WAY. SQUEEZING THE TERMINALS INTO THE HXR JACKS MAY DAMAGE THEM OR RESULT IN A MALFUNCTION OF THE CAMCORDER'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE CAMCORDER'S VIEWFINDER, LENS, LCD SCREEN TO THE SUN OR STRONG LIGHT SOURCE FOR EXTENDED PERIODS. INTENSE LIGHT SOURCES, ESPECIALLY THE SUN, WILL CONVERGE ON THE VIEWFINDER OR LENS AND DAMAGE THE INTERNAL PARTS OF THE CAMCORDER.'''
 
*'''ALWAYS CLOSE THE LENS COVER AND STORE IN CASE WHEN NOT IN USE'''
 
*'''DO NOT APPLY ANY LIQUID (CLEANING OR OTHERWISE) DIRECTLY TO THE LCD SCREEN'''
 
*'''IF THE CAMCORDER IS BROUGHT FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, MOISTURE MAY CONDENSE INSIDE THE CAMCORDER AND CAUSE A MALFUNCTION. WHEN YOU BRING THE HXR FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, PUT CAMCORDER IN A PLASTIC BAG AND SEAL IT TIGHTLY. REMOVE THE BAD WHEN THE AIR TEMPERATURE INSIDE THE PLASTIC BAG HAS REACHED AMBIENT TEMPERATURE(AFTER 1 HOUR)

==SUPPLYING POWER TO THE HXR==
===CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK===
APS provides two Lithium battery packs when you check out the HXR. Use the supplied AC Adapter/Charger to charge these batteries before use.
# Set the mode switch to charge
# Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
# Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
# Place the battery pack in the slot of the AC Adapter/Charger, press down, and slide battery until the charge lamp turns on and charging starts.
When the battery pack reaches a normal charge, the charge lamp turns off. You can continue to charge the battery pack for an additional hour for a full charge, which lets you use the battery a little longer. Remove the battery pack from the AC Adapter/Charger when the charge is completed.
===ATTACHING/REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK===
To attach the battery pack, press the battery against the back of the camcorder and slide it down.
 
To remove the battery pack, slide the '''POWER''' switch to '''OFF'''. Push the '''BAT RELEASE''' button and remove the battery pack.
===AC ADAPTER/CHARGER===
#Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Connect the power cord to the wall outlet
#Connect the connecting cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Set mode switch of the AC Adapter/Charger to '''VCR/CAMERA'''
#Press the connecting part of the connecting cord against the back of the HXR in the Battery slot and slide it down
* Use a nearby wall outlet when using the AC Adapter/Charger. '''Disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger from the wall outlet immediately if any malfunction occurs while using the camcorder.
* '''DO NOT''' use the AC Adapter/Charger placed in a narrow space, such as between a wall and furniture.
* '''DO NOT''' short-circuit the DC plug of the AC Adapter/Charger or battery terminal with any metallic objects. This may cause a malfunction.
* '''UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTER''' from the camcorder and wall socket when camcorder is not in use. Even if your camcorder is turned off, AC power is still supplied to it while connected to the wall outlet via the AC Adapter/Charger.
==OPERATING THE MENU==
# Set the '''POWER''' switch to ON
# Press the '''MENU''' button
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the icon of the desired menu is highlighted, then press the dial to select the menu.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired menu item is highlighted, then press the dial to select the item.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired setting is highlighted, the press the dial to select.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen. To return to the previous screen, select '''RETURN'''.
*'''TIP''': You may select menu items with the </> buttons.
**'''NOTE''': The available menu items vary depending on the context of your camcorder during recording or playback.
==MEMORY CARDS==
APS supplies two, 32GB memory cards (installed) when you check out the HXR camcorder. This should provide you with ample recording time, even at the highest quality settings. Should you require additional memory cards for your production, you can use "Memory Stick PRO Duo" media, "Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo" media, SD memory cards and, SDHC memory cards.
* '''Remeber to re-install the memory cards supplied by APS before returning the camera should you choose to use your own media to avoid charges.'''
Before recording, format the memory card(s).
# With the camcorder powered on, press the '''MODE''' button.
# Touch '''MANAGE MEDIA''' setting '''MEDIA FORMAT'''
# Select the recording media to be formatted
# Select YES. The HXR will ask you to verify your selection.
*'''TIP''': The easiest wat to retrieve your files is to make a disk image of the memory card. You can check out a card reader from Media Loan and use the MML or Non-Linear Editing Suites to make your disk image(s). You can then use Final Cut Pro/Adobe Premiere to log and transfer your video for editing.
** '''NOTE''': While [Executing...] is displayed, do not operate the buttons on the camcorder, disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger, or removing recording media from the camcorder. (The access lamp is light or flashing while formatting recording media.)
===NOTES ON RECORDING===
'''Estimated Recording Time on one 32 GB card in minutes with HD Audio Format set to Linear PCM/Dolby Digital:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! AVCHD 24M (FX) !! AVCHD 17M (FH) !! AVCHD 9M (HQ) !! AVCHD 5M (LP)
|-
| 170/180 || 225/235 || 385/435 || 605/750
|}
* When the access lamp is lit or flashing red, the camcorder is writing data on the recording media. Do not remove the battery pack or the AC Adapter/Charger.
* If a movie file exceeds 2GB during recording, the camcorder divides the file and create a new file automatically.
* The menu settings are stored in your camcorder when you turn the '''POWER''' switch to OFF. Do not remove battery pack or AC Adapter/Charger.
==RECORDING==
# Open the shutter of the lens hood.
# Slide the '''POWER''' switch to ON while pressing the green button.
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
To STOP recording, press the record button or the handle record button again.
*'''TIP''': When recording in high definition image quality (HD), the aspect ratio is fixed to 16:9. When recording in standard definition image quality (SD), you can switch the aspect ratio to 4:3.
*'''TIP''': For low angle recording, the handle record button is convenient. Release the '''HOLD''' lever to enable the handle record button. It might be helpful if you set the LCD panel face up or close it after turning it face down, or life the viewfinder up during the low angle recording.
** '''NOTE''': the camcorder will switch from Memory Card A to Memory Card B just before space runs out on Card A (and vice versa). '''Do not eject memory card that is currently being used for recording. Replace only the memory card whose slot lamp is off.
===SELECTING RECORDING QUALITY===
You can set the recording image quality to high definition image quality (HD) or standard definition image quality (SD).
To change the setting:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select HD/SD SET
===SELECTING THE RECORDING FORMAT===
You can select the recording format (bit-rate, image size, frame rate, scanning system). The default setting is HD 1080/60i FX/SD 480/60i HQ.
To change the setting value:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select REC FORMAT
If you select HD 1080/60i FX (the default), movies are recorded with the following format:
* HD - High Definition image quality
* 1080 - Effective scanning lines
* 60 - Frame Rate
* i - Scanning system
* FX - Recording mode
====SETTING DESCRIPTION====
Bit Rate:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! LP
|-
| Max 24 Mbps || Approx 17 Mbps || Approx 9 Mbps || Approx 5 Mbps
|}
Image Size:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! SP
|-
| 1920x1080/1280x720 || 1920x1080/1280x720 || HD recording 1440x1080 SD recording 720x480 || 1440x1080
|}
Frame rate: 24,30 or 60
Scanning system:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! i !! p !! pSCAN
|-
| Interlaced || Progressive || Recording images of progressive scanning as interlace signal (60i)
|}
*For a complete list of setting values, see the complete manual, available on [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf here].
**'''NOTE''': The recording mode is fixed to FX or FH with the progressive scanning system.
**'''NOTE''': When the recording format is changed to or from 720/60p, you will be prompted to reboot the camcorder. Select YES. Otherwise, you cannot switch the recording format.
==ADJUSTING THE ZOOM==
===USING THE POWER ZOOM===
The power zoom lever is pressure sensitive. For a slower zoom use less pressure and for a faster zoom use more pressure.
*'''NOTE''': Be sure to keep your finger on the power zoom lever. If you move your finger off the power zoom lever, the operation sound of the power zoom lever mat also be recorded.
===USING THE HANDLE ZOOM===
* Set the handle zoom switch to VAR or FIX
* Press the handle zoom lever to zoom in or out
When you set the handle zoom switch to VAR, you can zoom in or out at variable speed.
When you set the handle zoom switch to FIX, you can zoom in or out at fixed speed set in HANDLE ZOOM.
You cannot use the handle zoom lever when the handle zoom switch is set to OFF.
===USING THE ZOOM RING===
You can zoom at the desired speed by turning the zoom ring. Fine adjustment is also possible.
Turn the zoom ring at moderate speed. If you turn it too fast, the zoom speed may lag behind the zoom ring rotation speed, or the operation sound of the zoom may also be recorded.
====ADJUSTING THE FOCUS MANUALLY====
# Set the FOCUS switch to MAN
# Rotate the focus ring and adjust the focus.
*'''TIP''': It is easier to focus on the subject when you use the zoom function. Move the power zoom lever towards T (telephoto) to adjust the focus, and then towards W (wide angle) to adjust the zoom/compose your shot recording.
====PUSH AUTO FOCUS====
Record the subject while pressing and holding the PUSH AUTO button. If you release the button, the setting returns to manual focusing. Use this function to shift the focus on one subject to another (Rack Focus). The scenes will shift smoothly.
==ADJUSTING THE IMAGE BRIGHTNESS==
You can adjust the image brightness by adjusting the iris, gain, shutter speed or by reducing the light volume with the ND Filter.
*'''NOTE''': You cannot use the back light function and the spotlight when iris, gain and shutter speed are adjusted manually.
*'''NOTE''': AE SHIFT si not effective temporarily while you adjust the iris, gain, and shutter speed manually.
===ADJUSTING THE IRIS===
You can manually adjust the iris to control the volume of the light entering the lens. By adjusting the iris, you can change or close the aperture of the lens, which is expressed as an F value between F1.6 and F11. The volume of the light increases the more you open the aperture (decreasing F value). The volume of light decreases the more that you close the aperture (increasing F value). The current F value appears on the screen.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''IRIS''' button if "A" is displayed next to current iris value.
# Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
*'''TIP''': The F value becomes close to F3.4 as the zoom position changes from W to T even when you open the aperture by setting the F value low then F3.4, such as F1.6.
*'''TIP''': The range of focus, an important effect of the aperture, is called depth of field. The depth of field gets shallower as the aperture is opened and deeper as the aperture is closed.
===ADJUSTING THE GAIN===
You can adjust the gain manually when you do not want to use the AGC (Automatic Gain Control).
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL'''switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''GAIN''' button if "A" is displayed next to current gain value.
# Set the gain switch to H,M or L. The gain value set for the selected fain switch position appears on the screen. You can set the gain value for each gain switch from [GAIN SET] of the (CAMERA SET) menu.
===ADJUSTING THE SHUTTER SPEED===
You can manually adjust and fix the shutter speed. You can make a moving object look still or emphasize the movement of a moving subject by adjusting the shutter speed.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch
# Press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button until the shutter speed value is highlighted.
# Change the shutter speed displayed on the screen by turning the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can adjust the shutter speed in a range 1/4 second through 1/10000 second. The denominator of the set shutter speed appears on the screen when you set the shutter speed to 1/100 second. The larger the value on the screen, the faster the shutter speed.
# Press the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to lock the shutter speed. To readjust the shutter speed, do steps 2 to 4 again.
===ADJUSTING THE ND FILTER===
You can record the subject clearly by using the ND filter when the recording environment is too bright. The ND filters 1, 2, and 3 reduce the volume of light to about 1/4, 1/16 and 1/64 respectively.
If ND1 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 1. If ND2 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 2. If ND3 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 3. The ND filter indicator will stop flashing and remain on the screen.
If NDOFF flashes set the ND filter to off. The ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': If you change the ND filter to OFF, the ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': When adjusting the iris manually, the ND filter icon does not flash even if the light volume should be adjusted with the ND filter.
*'''NOTE''': If the camcorder cannot detect the ND filter position (OFF/1/2/3), ND flashes on the screen. Make sure that the ND filter is set correctly.
**'''TIP''': While recording a bright subject, diffraction may occur if you close the aperture further down, resulting in a fuzzy focus (this is a common phenomenon with video cameras). The ND filter suppresses this phenomenon and gives better recording results.
===WHITE BALANCE===
You can adjust and fix white balance according to the lighting conditions of recording environment. You can store white balance values in memory A and memory B. Unless a white balance is readjusted, values will remain even after the power has been turned off.
====SETTING WHITE BALANCE====
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button.
# Set the white balance memory switch to '''A''' or '''B'''.
# Capture a white subject, such as white paper, full-screen in the same lighting condition as the subject.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button (one push) WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B starts flashing rapidly. It will stay on when the white balance adjustment is completed and the adjusted value is stored in WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B.
*'''NOTE''': When a white balance adjustment value has not been obtained successfully, WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B turns from rapid flashing to slow flashing. Adjust the subject appropriately and set the shutter speed to auto or around 1/60, the try adjusting white balance again.
===GAIN SET===

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-04-02T15:19:51Z

Kisaar24: /* ADJUSTING THE ND FILTER */

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/aps_SonyHXR.pdf Sony HXR Operating Guide - PDF] 
[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf Sony HXR Complete Manual - PDF] 

[http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/2014/03/27/sony-hxr-nx5u-nxcam/ Video Tutorials]

=='''INTRODUCTION''' ==
The Sony HXR-NX5U is a prosumer HD camcorder that records to memory cards utilizing the AVCHD format. This camcorder provides high quality, long duration recording with dual memory card slots, state-of-the-art G lens and 3 CMOS sensors. As with all Media Loan Equipment, '''''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE''''' for the HXR and all accessories when you check this camera out from APS.

=='''Precautions''' ==
*'''DO NOT HOLD THE CAMCORDER BY THE:'''
:::LENS HOOD
:::LCD PANEL
:::INTERNAL MICROPHONE
:::MICROPHONE OR MICROPHONE HOLDER
:::VIEWFINDER
*'''PROTECT THE HXR FROM WATER AND SOURCES OF MOISTURE OR SALT WATER/SPRAY. THE CAMERA IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE BATTERY PACK TO WATER. THE BATTERY PACK IS NOT WATER RESISTANT'''
 
*'''DO NOT SHAKE, KNOCK, DROP OR SUBJECT THE HXR TO EXCESSICE SHOCK. (NO BIKE DOLLIES!)'''
 
*'''CONNECT CANLES TO THE CAMCORDER WITH THEIR TERMINALS PLACED THE CORRECT WAY. SQUEEZING THE TERMINALS INTO THE HXR JACKS MAY DAMAGE THEM OR RESULT IN A MALFUNCTION OF THE CAMCORDER'''
 
*'''DO NOT EXPOSE THE CAMCORDER'S VIEWFINDER, LENS, LCD SCREEN TO THE SUN OR STRONG LIGHT SOURCE FOR EXTENDED PERIODS. INTENSE LIGHT SOURCES, ESPECIALLY THE SUN, WILL CONVERGE ON THE VIEWFINDER OR LENS AND DAMAGE THE INTERNAL PARTS OF THE CAMCORDER.'''
 
*'''ALWAYS CLOSE THE LENS COVER AND STORE IN CASE WHEN NOT IN USE'''
 
*'''DO NOT APPLY ANY LIQUID (CLEANING OR OTHERWISE) DIRECTLY TO THE LCD SCREEN'''
 
*'''IF THE CAMCORDER IS BROUGHT FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, MOISTURE MAY CONDENSE INSIDE THE CAMCORDER AND CAUSE A MALFUNCTION. WHEN YOU BRING THE HXR FROM A COLD PLACE TO A WARM PLACE, PUT CAMCORDER IN A PLASTIC BAG AND SEAL IT TIGHTLY. REMOVE THE BAD WHEN THE AIR TEMPERATURE INSIDE THE PLASTIC BAG HAS REACHED AMBIENT TEMPERATURE(AFTER 1 HOUR)

==SUPPLYING POWER TO THE HXR==
===CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK===
APS provides two Lithium battery packs when you check out the HXR. Use the supplied AC Adapter/Charger to charge these batteries before use.
# Set the mode switch to charge
# Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
# Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
# Place the battery pack in the slot of the AC Adapter/Charger, press down, and slide battery until the charge lamp turns on and charging starts.
When the battery pack reaches a normal charge, the charge lamp turns off. You can continue to charge the battery pack for an additional hour for a full charge, which lets you use the battery a little longer. Remove the battery pack from the AC Adapter/Charger when the charge is completed.
===ATTACHING/REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK===
To attach the battery pack, press the battery against the back of the camcorder and slide it down.
 
To remove the battery pack, slide the '''POWER''' switch to '''OFF'''. Push the '''BAT RELEASE''' button and remove the battery pack.
===AC ADAPTER/CHARGER===
#Connect the power cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Connect the power cord to the wall outlet
#Connect the connecting cord to the AC Adapter/Charger
#Set mode switch of the AC Adapter/Charger to '''VCR/CAMERA'''
#Press the connecting part of the connecting cord against the back of the HXR in the Battery slot and slide it down
* Use a nearby wall outlet when using the AC Adapter/Charger. '''Disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger from the wall outlet immediately if any malfunction occurs while using the camcorder.
* '''DO NOT''' use the AC Adapter/Charger placed in a narrow space, such as between a wall and furniture.
* '''DO NOT''' short-circuit the DC plug of the AC Adapter/Charger or battery terminal with any metallic objects. This may cause a malfunction.
* '''UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTER''' from the camcorder and wall socket when camcorder is not in use. Even if your camcorder is turned off, AC power is still supplied to it while connected to the wall outlet via the AC Adapter/Charger.
==OPERATING THE MENU==
# Set the '''POWER''' switch to ON
# Press the '''MENU''' button
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the icon of the desired menu is highlighted, then press the dial to select the menu.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired menu item is highlighted, then press the dial to select the item.
# Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial until the desired setting is highlighted, the press the dial to select.
# Press the '''MENU''' button to hide the menu screen. To return to the previous screen, select '''RETURN'''.
*'''TIP''': You may select menu items with the </> buttons.
**'''NOTE''': The available menu items vary depending on the context of your camcorder during recording or playback.
==MEMORY CARDS==
APS supplies two, 32GB memory cards (installed) when you check out the HXR camcorder. This should provide you with ample recording time, even at the highest quality settings. Should you require additional memory cards for your production, you can use "Memory Stick PRO Duo" media, "Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo" media, SD memory cards and, SDHC memory cards.
* '''Remeber to re-install the memory cards supplied by APS before returning the camera should you choose to use your own media to avoid charges.'''
Before recording, format the memory card(s).
# With the camcorder powered on, press the '''MODE''' button.
# Touch '''MANAGE MEDIA''' setting '''MEDIA FORMAT'''
# Select the recording media to be formatted
# Select YES. The HXR will ask you to verify your selection.
*'''TIP''': The easiest wat to retrieve your files is to make a disk image of the memory card. You can check out a card reader from Media Loan and use the MML or Non-Linear Editing Suites to make your disk image(s). You can then use Final Cut Pro/Adobe Premiere to log and transfer your video for editing.
** '''NOTE''': While [Executing...] is displayed, do not operate the buttons on the camcorder, disconnect the AC Adapter/Charger, or removing recording media from the camcorder. (The access lamp is light or flashing while formatting recording media.)
===NOTES ON RECORDING===
'''Estimated Recording Time on one 32 GB card in minutes with HD Audio Format set to Linear PCM/Dolby Digital:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! AVCHD 24M (FX) !! AVCHD 17M (FH) !! AVCHD 9M (HQ) !! AVCHD 5M (LP)
|-
| 170/180 || 225/235 || 385/435 || 605/750
|}
* When the access lamp is lit or flashing red, the camcorder is writing data on the recording media. Do not remove the battery pack or the AC Adapter/Charger.
* If a movie file exceeds 2GB during recording, the camcorder divides the file and create a new file automatically.
* The menu settings are stored in your camcorder when you turn the '''POWER''' switch to OFF. Do not remove battery pack or AC Adapter/Charger.
==RECORDING==
# Open the shutter of the lens hood.
# Slide the '''POWER''' switch to ON while pressing the green button.
The recording lamp lights up during recording.
To STOP recording, press the record button or the handle record button again.
*'''TIP''': When recording in high definition image quality (HD), the aspect ratio is fixed to 16:9. When recording in standard definition image quality (SD), you can switch the aspect ratio to 4:3.
*'''TIP''': For low angle recording, the handle record button is convenient. Release the '''HOLD''' lever to enable the handle record button. It might be helpful if you set the LCD panel face up or close it after turning it face down, or life the viewfinder up during the low angle recording.
** '''NOTE''': the camcorder will switch from Memory Card A to Memory Card B just before space runs out on Card A (and vice versa). '''Do not eject memory card that is currently being used for recording. Replace only the memory card whose slot lamp is off.
===SELECTING RECORDING QUALITY===
You can set the recording image quality to high definition image quality (HD) or standard definition image quality (SD).
To change the setting:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select HD/SD SET
===SELECTING THE RECORDING FORMAT===
You can select the recording format (bit-rate, image size, frame rate, scanning system). The default setting is HD 1080/60i FX/SD 480/60i HQ.
To change the setting value:
# Press '''MENU'''
# Select REC/OUT settings
# Select REC SET
# Select REC FORMAT
If you select HD 1080/60i FX (the default), movies are recorded with the following format:
* HD - High Definition image quality
* 1080 - Effective scanning lines
* 60 - Frame Rate
* i - Scanning system
* FX - Recording mode
====SETTING DESCRIPTION====
Bit Rate:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! LP
|-
| Max 24 Mbps || Approx 17 Mbps || Approx 9 Mbps || Approx 5 Mbps
|}
Image Size:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! FX !! FH !! HQ !! SP
|-
| 1920x1080/1280x720 || 1920x1080/1280x720 || HD recording 1440x1080 SD recording 720x480 || 1440x1080
|}
Frame rate: 24,30 or 60
Scanning system:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! i !! p !! pSCAN
|-
| Interlaced || Progressive || Recording images of progressive scanning as interlace signal (60i)
|}
*For a complete list of setting values, see the complete manual, available on [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/docs/FINAL_HXR-NX5U_Ops_Manual.pdf here].
**'''NOTE''': The recording mode is fixed to FX or FH with the progressive scanning system.
**'''NOTE''': When the recording format is changed to or from 720/60p, you will be prompted to reboot the camcorder. Select YES. Otherwise, you cannot switch the recording format.
==ADJUSTING THE ZOOM==
===USING THE POWER ZOOM===
The power zoom lever is pressure sensitive. For a slower zoom use less pressure and for a faster zoom use more pressure.
*'''NOTE''': Be sure to keep your finger on the power zoom lever. If you move your finger off the power zoom lever, the operation sound of the power zoom lever mat also be recorded.
===USING THE HANDLE ZOOM===
* Set the handle zoom switch to VAR or FIX
* Press the handle zoom lever to zoom in or out
When you set the handle zoom switch to VAR, you can zoom in or out at variable speed.
When you set the handle zoom switch to FIX, you can zoom in or out at fixed speed set in HANDLE ZOOM.
You cannot use the handle zoom lever when the handle zoom switch is set to OFF.
===USING THE ZOOM RING===
You can zoom at the desired speed by turning the zoom ring. Fine adjustment is also possible.
Turn the zoom ring at moderate speed. If you turn it too fast, the zoom speed may lag behind the zoom ring rotation speed, or the operation sound of the zoom may also be recorded.
====ADJUSTING THE FOCUS MANUALLY====
# Set the FOCUS switch to MAN
# Rotate the focus ring and adjust the focus.
*'''TIP''': It is easier to focus on the subject when you use the zoom function. Move the power zoom lever towards T (telephoto) to adjust the focus, and then towards W (wide angle) to adjust the zoom/compose your shot recording.
====PUSH AUTO FOCUS====
Record the subject while pressing and holding the PUSH AUTO button. If you release the button, the setting returns to manual focusing. Use this function to shift the focus on one subject to another (Rack Focus). The scenes will shift smoothly.
==ADJUSTING THE IMAGE BRIGHTNESS==
You can adjust the image brightness by adjusting the iris, gain, shutter speed or by reducing the light volume with the ND Filter.
*'''NOTE''': You cannot use the back light function and the spotlight when iris, gain and shutter speed are adjusted manually.
*'''NOTE''': AE SHIFT si not effective temporarily while you adjust the iris, gain, and shutter speed manually.
===ADJUSTING THE IRIS===
You can manually adjust the iris to control the volume of the light entering the lens. By adjusting the iris, you can change or close the aperture of the lens, which is expressed as an F value between F1.6 and F11. The volume of the light increases the more you open the aperture (decreasing F value). The volume of light decreases the more that you close the aperture (increasing F value). The current F value appears on the screen.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''IRIS''' button if "A" is displayed next to current iris value.
# Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
*'''TIP''': The F value becomes close to F3.4 as the zoom position changes from W to T even when you open the aperture by setting the F value low then F3.4, such as F1.6.
*'''TIP''': The range of focus, an important effect of the aperture, is called depth of field. The depth of field gets shallower as the aperture is opened and deeper as the aperture is closed.
===ADJUSTING THE GAIN===
You can adjust the gain manually when you do not want to use the AGC (Automatic Gain Control).
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL'''switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''GAIN''' button if "A" is displayed next to current gain value.
# Set the gain switch to H,M or L. The gain value set for the selected fain switch position appears on the screen. You can set the gain value for each gain switch from [GAIN SET] of the (CAMERA SET) menu.
===ADJUSTING THE SHUTTER SPEED===
You can manually adjust and fix the shutter speed. You can make a moving object look still or emphasize the movement of a moving subject by adjusting the shutter speed.
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch
# Press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button until the shutter speed value is highlighted.
# Change the shutter speed displayed on the screen by turning the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. You can adjust the shutter speed in a range 1/4 second through 1/10000 second. The denominator of the set shutter speed appears on the screen when you set the shutter speed to 1/100 second. The larger the value on the screen, the faster the shutter speed.
# Press the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to lock the shutter speed. To readjust the shutter speed, do steps 2 to 4 again.
===ADJUSTING THE ND FILTER===
You can record the subject clearly by using the ND filter when the recording environment is too bright. The ND filters 1, 2, and 3 reduce the volume of light to about 1/4, 1/16 and 1/64 respectively.
If ND1 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 1. If ND2 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 2. If ND3 flashes during the iris automatic adjustment, set the ND filter to 3. The ND filter indicator will stop flashing and remain on the screen.
If NDOFF flashes set the ND filter to off. The ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': If you change the ND filter to OFF, the ND filter icon will disappear from the screen.
*'''NOTE''': When adjusting the iris manually, the ND filter icon does not flash even if the light volume should be adjusted with the ND filter.
*'''NOTE''': If the camcorder cannot detect the ND filter position (OFF/1/2/3), ND flashes on the screen. Make sure that the ND filter is set correctly.
**'''TIP''': While recording a bright subject, diffraction may occur if you close the aperture further down, resulting in a fuzzy focus (this is a common phenomenon with video cameras). The ND filter suppresses this phenomenon and gives better recording results.
===WHITE BALANCE===
You can adjust and fix white balance according to the lighting conditions of recording environment. You can store white balance values in memory A and memory B. Unless a white balance is readjusted, values will remain even after the power has been turned off.
====SETTING WHITE BALANCE====
# During recording or standby, set the '''AUTO/MANUAL''' switch to MANUAL.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button.
# Set the white balance memory switch to '''A''' or '''B'''.
# Capture a white subject, such as white paper, full-screen in the same lighting condition as the subject.
# Press the '''WHT BAL''' button (one push) WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B starts flashing rapidly. It will stay on when the white balance adjustment is completed and the adjusted value is stored in WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B.
*'''NOTE''': When a white balance adjustment value has not been obtained successfully, WHT BAL A or WHT BAL B turns from rapid flashing to slow flashing. Adjust the subject appropriately and set the shutter speed to auto or around 1/60, the try adjusting white balance again.
===GAIN SET===

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-03-31T18:57:55Z

Kisaar24:

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-03-31T18:18:06Z

Kisaar24:

APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide

2014-03-31T18:04:12Z

Kisaar24:

White Lighting Flash Heads Proficiency Test

2013-10-29T18:14:57Z

Kisaar24: /* Written Test */

===Written Test===
Answers may be found in the [[White Lightning Flash Heads Quick Guide]]. Call Media Loan at '''867-6253''' if you have any questions. 
'''Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency'''. 

# When and why is a safe sync adapter important?
# Describe the importance of the Test/Dump button.
# What are the different Model Lamp Modes and when would you use each?
# List some of the precautions you should take before using this equipment.
# Name three things that could permanently damage this equipment.
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility once you have checked out any equipment from Media Loan?

===Operational Proficiency===
'''To be done during your scheduled proficiency.'''
* Describe all controls and parts of the unit and its accessories.
* Set up the lights with the accessories.
* Connect the Light Kit to a camera.
* Use a camera to shoot a few pictures.
* Disassemble and pack everything away neatly.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon Rebel XSi Operating Guide

2013-08-26T21:23:19Z

Kisaar24: /* Attaching & Detaching Lens */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and [[Canon Rebel T1i/T2i Operating Guide]] and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/photo-manual-rebelxt.pdf Rebel XT Manual] 

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/photo_manual_rebelxsi.pdf Rebel XSi Manual]

=== Caring for Media Loan Equipment ===
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel XT and XSi cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure it's long-term use at Evergreen. 

'''Do NOT:'''
* Drop this camera
* Submerge this camera in water
* Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
* Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
* Store this camera in excessive cold
* Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
* Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
* Use excessive physical force
* Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

<gallery>
File:XT-Head-On.jpg|
File:XT-Back-View.jpg|
File:XT-Top-View.jpg|
File:Rebelx-01-parts.png|XT Parts
File:Rebelx-02-parts.png|XT Parts
File:Rebelx-03-lcdpanel.png|XT LCD Panel
File:Rebelx-04-viewfinder.png|XT Viewfinder
File:Rebelx-05-modedial.png|XT Mode Dial
</gallery>

=== Installing & Removing Battery ===
* To open the battery compartment, slide the compartment lever in the direction of the back of the camera as shown by the arrow.
* Insert the battery with the power contacts pointed downward until the battery locks into place.
* Close the cover and slide the lever back in place as indicated by the arrow until it snaps shut.
* Do not charge the battery for 24 hours or more! 

'''About the Battery's Life''' 

When the camera is ON, the battery level will be indicated in 1 of 3 levels:
* Battery level is OK
* Battery level is low
* Battery must be recharged 

Tip: To save battery power, you may set the Auto-off function of the menu to turn the camera off automatically.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-06-battery.png|XT Installing Battery
File:Rebelx-07-battery.png|XT Removing Battery
</gallery>

=== Attaching & Detaching Lens ===
* '''To attach the lens,''' align the EF-S lens with the camera's white EF-S lens mount index and turn the lens in a clockwise direction as shown by the arrow until the lens clicks into place.
* When attaching a lens other than an EF-S lens, align the lens with the red EF lens index mark.
* '''To detach the lens,''' while pressing the lens release button, turn the lens in a counter-clockwise direction.
* Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. 
 

When attaching or detaching the lens, '''take care to prevent dust from entering the camer through the lens mount.''' Removing the lens can cause debris to get inside the camera making the camera highly susceptible to serious damage. If the lens is removed, avoid putting your fingers inside the camera. If the mirror, or any other part of the inside of this camera gets dirty, please bring it back to Media Loan so that a qualified staff member can service the camera.
<gallery>
File:XT-Lens-Change.jpg|
File:Rebelx-08-lens.png|XT Lens
</gallery>

=== Installing & Removing CF Card ===
* To insert the CF Card open the compartment cover.
* Insert the CF Card until the CF Card's eject button pops up.
* Close the cover and slide it back in place as indicated by the arrow until the cover snaps shut. 
 

Unless you plan to put the CF card into a card reader, please do not remove it. Do not bend the card or put the card into the card slot backwards.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-09-cfcard.png|Install Card
File:Rebelx-10-cfcard.png|Remove Card
</gallery>

=== Dioptric Adjustment ===
* Turn the dioptric adjustment knob left or right until the AF points in the viewfinder look sharp.
* By adjusting the diopter to suit your eyesight, you can see a sharp viewfinder image even without eyeglasses.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-19-dioptric.png|XT Dioptric Adjustment
</gallery>

=== Menu Operations ===

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-12-dial.png|XT
File:Rebelx-13-crosskeys.png|XT
File:Rebelx-14-menuops.png|XT
File:Rebelx-15-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-16-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-17-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-18-restore.png|XT
</gallery>

=== Manual Focusing ===
*Set the lens focus mode switch to MF and focus the subject by turning the lens focusing ring.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-25-manualfocus.png|XT Manual Focus
</gallery>

=== Auto-Focusing ===
* On the lens, set the focus mode to AF. If the lens is set to MF, auto-focus will not be possible.
* Setting the mode dial to Full Auto will set the following:
** The AF mode will set to AI Focus AF*.
** The drive mode will set to Single Shooting.
** The Metering Mode will set to Evaluate Metering.
* AI Focus AF wil automatically change to AI Servo AF to track a subject that's moving. 
 

Auto-Focus can fail to achieve focus (the focus confirmation light blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
* Low-contrast subjects.
* Solid-color walls.
* Subject in low light.
* Extremely backlit and reflective subjects, e.g. reflection from car window.
* Overlapping near and far objects, e.g. animal in a cage.
* Repetitive patterns, e.g. skyscraper windows.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-11-shutterbutton.png|XT Shutter Bug
</gallery>

=== Selecting the Metering Mode ===
* The camera has three metering modes; Evaluate, Partial and Center-weighted average metering.
* Evaluate Metering is the camera's standard metering mode suited for most subjects even under backlit conditions.
* During manual focusing, evaluative metering is based on the center AF point.
* Partial Metering is effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting.
* Center-weighted Average Metering is weighted at the center and then averaged for the entire scene.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-26-meteringmode.png|XT Metering Mode
</gallery>

=== Exposure ===
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-30-manualexp.png|Manual Exposure
File:Rebelx-31-manualexp.png|Manual Exposure
File:Rebelx-32-expcontrol.png|Exposure Compensation
</gallery>

=== Selecting the Drive Mode ===
* Look at the LCD panel and press the button to select mode.
** Single shooting - When you press the shutter button completely, one shot will be taken.
** Continuous Shooting - While you press the shutter button completely, shots will be taken continuously according to speed allowed by current settings.
** Self Timer/Remote Control - Press the shutter button completely, a beeper will sound, the self-timer lamp will start blinking and the shot will be taken about 10 sec. later.

=== Setting the White Balance ===
Normally, the white balance is set automatically, but if natural-looking colors cannot be obtained, you can set the white balance manually to suit the respective light source. Please be considerate of other users and return the white balance setting back to automatic (AWB).
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-22-wb.png|XT White Balance
File:Rebelx-23-wb.png|XT White Balance
File:Rebelx-24-wb.png|XT White Balance
</gallery>

=== Setting the ISO Speed ===
* The ISO speed is set automatically within ISO 100-400.
* You can set the ISO speed to [100] [200] [400] [800] [1600] only in creative modes.
* '''Tip:''' At higher ISO speeds and higher ambient temperatures, the image will look more grainy. Also, high temperatures, high ISO speeds, or long exposures may cause irregular colors in the image.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-21-isospeed.png|XT ISO Speed
</gallery>

=== Advanced Operations ===
With the Creative Zone modes, you can set the desired shutter speed or aperture value depending which mode is currently selected.
* P - Program Auto Exposure is a general purpose shooting mode. The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to suit the subject's brightness.
* Tv - Shutter-priority AE is used to set the shutter speed. The camera will automatically set the aperture value to suit the subject's brightness.
** Turn the shutter dial to change priority settings. A faster shutter speed can freeze the motion of a fast-moving subject.
* Av - Aperture-priority AE lets you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to suit the subject brightness.
* M - Manual Exposure lets you manually set both the shutter speed and aperture value as desired, use Av +/ button to toggle between settings.
* A-Dep - Automatic Depth-of-Field AE is used to obtain a wide depth of field automatically between a near subject and far subject. It is effective for group photos or landscapes.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-27-TV-shutterpriority.png|XT TV
File:Rebelx-28-AV-AperturePriority.png|XT AV
File:Rebelx-29-dofpreview.png|XT Depth of Field Preview
</gallery>

=== Image-Recording Quality Settings ===
'''Image File Size & CF Card Capacity''' 

'''Tip:''' The RAW file setting assumes that the image will undergo post-processing with a personal computer. Special software such as Adobe Bridge or Photoshop is required to view the images or edit them for printing. Try and test before assuming your setup will work for major projects.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-20-imageqlty.png|XT Image Quality
</gallery>

=== Playback ===
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-33-playback.png|XT Playback
File:Rebelx-34-playback.png|XT Playback
</gallery>

=== Displaying the Images on a TV ===
* Connect the camera to the TV.
** Open the camera's terminal cover.
** Use the video cable to connect the camera's video out terminal to the TV monitor's VIDEO IN terminal.
** Turn on the TV and switch the TV's line input to Video IN.
** Turn the power switch to ON
** Press the PLAY button on camera back.
** The image will appear on the TV screen. (The camera's LCD monitor will display nothing.)
** After you finish set the power switch to OFF, turn off the TV and disconnect the cable.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-35-tvdisply.png|XT
File:Rebelx-36-tvdisply.png|XT
</gallery>

=== Transferring Images to a Computer ===
(Using Windows Vista, XP or Mac OSX (v 10.3/10.4)
* Plug camera USB cable into Camera USB port.
* Plug other end of cable into an available USB port.
* Turn camera on and wait follow on-screen prompts.
'''Note:''' It may take a few minutes for the initial install before you can transfer your photos.

'''Disconnecting the Camera''' 

Make sure no information is being transferred (Red light is not flashing and LCD does not display "BUSY"). Then unplug the USB cable and turn off the camera.
Please note: For some older versions of Mac OS you must unmount the camera drive by dragging it to the trash bin before disconnecting the USB cable or turning the camera off.

=== Rebel XSi ===
<gallery>
File:XSi-Head-On.jpg|
File:XSi-Back-View.jpg|
File:XSi-Top-View.jpg|
File:XSi-Flash.jpg|
</gallery>
'''Differences from the XTi/XT'''
* The Rebel XSi introduces a number of new features, however, to most users there are only a few updates to be aware of. Liveview, Spot metering and a few moved buttons (see diagram, right) are the more relevant changes made.
* Live View
** It is possible to view a real-time image through the LCD screen by using the Live View function. Live View only works in the creative zone modes, so make sure to set the shooting mode accordingly.
** To turn on Live View, open the camera menu and select the Tools 2 menu (tools icon with 2 dots). Select “Live View Function Settings” and press SET.
** Select “Live View Shoot” and press SET.
** Select “Enable” and press SET again.
** Press the MENU button to exit.
** To display the Live View image, press SET and the image should appear on the LCD. This image will reflect the actual brightness of the captured image.
* Spot metering
** WIth the new XSi you can now choose spot metering, which uses a large circular area for metering in the center of the viewfinder.

=== Trouble Shooting ===
This is to help you navigate through error messages and simple problems. '''Remember, never try to force the camera!''' If this guide does not help you with your problem, please return the camera to Media Loan and describe the issue to a staff member.
* '''Only the icon blinks on the top of LCD panel'''
** The battery is almost exhausted.
* '''No images can be shot nor recorded'''
** The CF card is not properly inserted.
** The CF card is full.
** The battery is exhausted.
** You did not focus perfectly (When focused, the focus confirmation light in the viewfinder blinks.
** Settings are incorrect for exposure.
* '''The LCD panel does not display a clear image'''
** Bring camera back to Media Loan for servicing.
* '''The image is out of focus'''
** The Lens focus mode switch is set to MF (manual).
** The camera was shaken when the picture was taken or shutter speed was not fast enough for hand held shooting.

[[category:Media Loan]]

Canon Rebel XSi Operating Guide

2013-08-26T21:22:39Z

Kisaar24: /* Caring for Media Loan Equipment */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and [[Canon Rebel T1i/T2i Operating Guide]] and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/photo-manual-rebelxt.pdf Rebel XT Manual] 

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/photo_manual_rebelxsi.pdf Rebel XSi Manual]

=== Caring for Media Loan Equipment ===
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel XT and XSi cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure it's long-term use at Evergreen. 

'''Do NOT:'''
* Drop this camera
* Submerge this camera in water
* Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
* Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
* Store this camera in excessive cold
* Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
* Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
* Use excessive physical force
* Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

<gallery>
File:XT-Head-On.jpg|
File:XT-Back-View.jpg|
File:XT-Top-View.jpg|
File:Rebelx-01-parts.png|XT Parts
File:Rebelx-02-parts.png|XT Parts
File:Rebelx-03-lcdpanel.png|XT LCD Panel
File:Rebelx-04-viewfinder.png|XT Viewfinder
File:Rebelx-05-modedial.png|XT Mode Dial
</gallery>

=== Installing & Removing Battery ===
* To open the battery compartment, slide the compartment lever in the direction of the back of the camera as shown by the arrow.
* Insert the battery with the power contacts pointed downward until the battery locks into place.
* Close the cover and slide the lever back in place as indicated by the arrow until it snaps shut.
* Do not charge the battery for 24 hours or more! 

'''About the Battery's Life''' 

When the camera is ON, the battery level will be indicated in 1 of 3 levels:
* Battery level is OK
* Battery level is low
* Battery must be recharged 

Tip: To save battery power, you may set the Auto-off function of the menu to turn the camera off automatically.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-06-battery.png|XT Installing Battery
File:Rebelx-07-battery.png|XT Removing Battery
</gallery>

=== Attaching & Detaching Lens ===
* '''To attach the lens,''' align the EF-S lens with the camera's white EF-S lens mount index and turn the lens in a clockwise direction as shown by the arrow until the lens clicks into place.
* When attaching a lens other than an EF-S lens, align the lens with the red EF lens index mark.
* '''To detach the lens,''' while pressing the lens release button, turn the lens in a counter-clockwise direction.
* Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. 
 

When attaching or detaching the lens, '''take care to prevent dust from entering the camer through the lens mount.''' Removing the lens can cause debris to get inside the camera making the camera highly susceptible to serious damage. If the lens is removed, avoid putting your fingers inside the camera. If the mirror, or any other part of the inside of this camera gets dirty, please bring it back to Media Loan so that a qualified staff member can service the camera.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-08-lens.png|XT Lens
</gallery>

=== Installing & Removing CF Card ===
* To insert the CF Card open the compartment cover.
* Insert the CF Card until the CF Card's eject button pops up.
* Close the cover and slide it back in place as indicated by the arrow until the cover snaps shut. 
 

Unless you plan to put the CF card into a card reader, please do not remove it. Do not bend the card or put the card into the card slot backwards.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-09-cfcard.png|Install Card
File:Rebelx-10-cfcard.png|Remove Card
</gallery>

=== Dioptric Adjustment ===
* Turn the dioptric adjustment knob left or right until the AF points in the viewfinder look sharp.
* By adjusting the diopter to suit your eyesight, you can see a sharp viewfinder image even without eyeglasses.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-19-dioptric.png|XT Dioptric Adjustment
</gallery>

=== Menu Operations ===

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-12-dial.png|XT
File:Rebelx-13-crosskeys.png|XT
File:Rebelx-14-menuops.png|XT
File:Rebelx-15-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-16-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-17-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-18-restore.png|XT
</gallery>

=== Manual Focusing ===
*Set the lens focus mode switch to MF and focus the subject by turning the lens focusing ring.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-25-manualfocus.png|XT Manual Focus
</gallery>

=== Auto-Focusing ===
* On the lens, set the focus mode to AF. If the lens is set to MF, auto-focus will not be possible.
* Setting the mode dial to Full Auto will set the following:
** The AF mode will set to AI Focus AF*.
** The drive mode will set to Single Shooting.
** The Metering Mode will set to Evaluate Metering.
* AI Focus AF wil automatically change to AI Servo AF to track a subject that's moving. 
 

Auto-Focus can fail to achieve focus (the focus confirmation light blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
* Low-contrast subjects.
* Solid-color walls.
* Subject in low light.
* Extremely backlit and reflective subjects, e.g. reflection from car window.
* Overlapping near and far objects, e.g. animal in a cage.
* Repetitive patterns, e.g. skyscraper windows.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-11-shutterbutton.png|XT Shutter Bug
</gallery>

=== Selecting the Metering Mode ===
* The camera has three metering modes; Evaluate, Partial and Center-weighted average metering.
* Evaluate Metering is the camera's standard metering mode suited for most subjects even under backlit conditions.
* During manual focusing, evaluative metering is based on the center AF point.
* Partial Metering is effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting.
* Center-weighted Average Metering is weighted at the center and then averaged for the entire scene.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-26-meteringmode.png|XT Metering Mode
</gallery>

=== Exposure ===
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-30-manualexp.png|Manual Exposure
File:Rebelx-31-manualexp.png|Manual Exposure
File:Rebelx-32-expcontrol.png|Exposure Compensation
</gallery>

=== Selecting the Drive Mode ===
* Look at the LCD panel and press the button to select mode.
** Single shooting - When you press the shutter button completely, one shot will be taken.
** Continuous Shooting - While you press the shutter button completely, shots will be taken continuously according to speed allowed by current settings.
** Self Timer/Remote Control - Press the shutter button completely, a beeper will sound, the self-timer lamp will start blinking and the shot will be taken about 10 sec. later.

=== Setting the White Balance ===
Normally, the white balance is set automatically, but if natural-looking colors cannot be obtained, you can set the white balance manually to suit the respective light source. Please be considerate of other users and return the white balance setting back to automatic (AWB).
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-22-wb.png|XT White Balance
File:Rebelx-23-wb.png|XT White Balance
File:Rebelx-24-wb.png|XT White Balance
</gallery>

=== Setting the ISO Speed ===
* The ISO speed is set automatically within ISO 100-400.
* You can set the ISO speed to [100] [200] [400] [800] [1600] only in creative modes.
* '''Tip:''' At higher ISO speeds and higher ambient temperatures, the image will look more grainy. Also, high temperatures, high ISO speeds, or long exposures may cause irregular colors in the image.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-21-isospeed.png|XT ISO Speed
</gallery>

=== Advanced Operations ===
With the Creative Zone modes, you can set the desired shutter speed or aperture value depending which mode is currently selected.
* P - Program Auto Exposure is a general purpose shooting mode. The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to suit the subject's brightness.
* Tv - Shutter-priority AE is used to set the shutter speed. The camera will automatically set the aperture value to suit the subject's brightness.
** Turn the shutter dial to change priority settings. A faster shutter speed can freeze the motion of a fast-moving subject.
* Av - Aperture-priority AE lets you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to suit the subject brightness.
* M - Manual Exposure lets you manually set both the shutter speed and aperture value as desired, use Av +/ button to toggle between settings.
* A-Dep - Automatic Depth-of-Field AE is used to obtain a wide depth of field automatically between a near subject and far subject. It is effective for group photos or landscapes.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-27-TV-shutterpriority.png|XT TV
File:Rebelx-28-AV-AperturePriority.png|XT AV
File:Rebelx-29-dofpreview.png|XT Depth of Field Preview
</gallery>

=== Image-Recording Quality Settings ===
'''Image File Size & CF Card Capacity''' 

'''Tip:''' The RAW file setting assumes that the image will undergo post-processing with a personal computer. Special software such as Adobe Bridge or Photoshop is required to view the images or edit them for printing. Try and test before assuming your setup will work for major projects.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-20-imageqlty.png|XT Image Quality
</gallery>

=== Playback ===
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-33-playback.png|XT Playback
File:Rebelx-34-playback.png|XT Playback
</gallery>

=== Displaying the Images on a TV ===
* Connect the camera to the TV.
** Open the camera's terminal cover.
** Use the video cable to connect the camera's video out terminal to the TV monitor's VIDEO IN terminal.
** Turn on the TV and switch the TV's line input to Video IN.
** Turn the power switch to ON
** Press the PLAY button on camera back.
** The image will appear on the TV screen. (The camera's LCD monitor will display nothing.)
** After you finish set the power switch to OFF, turn off the TV and disconnect the cable.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-35-tvdisply.png|XT
File:Rebelx-36-tvdisply.png|XT
</gallery>

=== Transferring Images to a Computer ===
(Using Windows Vista, XP or Mac OSX (v 10.3/10.4)
* Plug camera USB cable into Camera USB port.
* Plug other end of cable into an available USB port.
* Turn camera on and wait follow on-screen prompts.
'''Note:''' It may take a few minutes for the initial install before you can transfer your photos.

'''Disconnecting the Camera''' 

Make sure no information is being transferred (Red light is not flashing and LCD does not display "BUSY"). Then unplug the USB cable and turn off the camera.
Please note: For some older versions of Mac OS you must unmount the camera drive by dragging it to the trash bin before disconnecting the USB cable or turning the camera off.

=== Rebel XSi ===
<gallery>
File:XSi-Head-On.jpg|
File:XSi-Back-View.jpg|
File:XSi-Top-View.jpg|
File:XSi-Flash.jpg|
</gallery>
'''Differences from the XTi/XT'''
* The Rebel XSi introduces a number of new features, however, to most users there are only a few updates to be aware of. Liveview, Spot metering and a few moved buttons (see diagram, right) are the more relevant changes made.
* Live View
** It is possible to view a real-time image through the LCD screen by using the Live View function. Live View only works in the creative zone modes, so make sure to set the shooting mode accordingly.
** To turn on Live View, open the camera menu and select the Tools 2 menu (tools icon with 2 dots). Select “Live View Function Settings” and press SET.
** Select “Live View Shoot” and press SET.
** Select “Enable” and press SET again.
** Press the MENU button to exit.
** To display the Live View image, press SET and the image should appear on the LCD. This image will reflect the actual brightness of the captured image.
* Spot metering
** WIth the new XSi you can now choose spot metering, which uses a large circular area for metering in the center of the viewfinder.

=== Trouble Shooting ===
This is to help you navigate through error messages and simple problems. '''Remember, never try to force the camera!''' If this guide does not help you with your problem, please return the camera to Media Loan and describe the issue to a staff member.
* '''Only the icon blinks on the top of LCD panel'''
** The battery is almost exhausted.
* '''No images can be shot nor recorded'''
** The CF card is not properly inserted.
** The CF card is full.
** The battery is exhausted.
** You did not focus perfectly (When focused, the focus confirmation light in the viewfinder blinks.
** Settings are incorrect for exposure.
* '''The LCD panel does not display a clear image'''
** Bring camera back to Media Loan for servicing.
* '''The image is out of focus'''
** The Lens focus mode switch is set to MF (manual).
** The camera was shaken when the picture was taken or shutter speed was not fast enough for hand held shooting.

[[category:Media Loan]]

File:XSi-Top-View.jpg

2013-08-26T21:20:28Z

Kisaar24:

File:XSi-Head-On.jpg

2013-08-26T21:19:44Z

Kisaar24: Kisaar24 uploaded a new version of "File:XSi-Head-On.jpg"

Canon Rebel XSi Operating Guide

2013-08-26T21:18:19Z

Kisaar24: /* Rebel XSi */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and [[Canon Rebel T1i/T2i Operating Guide]] and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/photo-manual-rebelxt.pdf Rebel XT Manual] 

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/photo_manual_rebelxsi.pdf Rebel XSi Manual]

=== Caring for Media Loan Equipment ===
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel XT and XSi cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure it's long-term use at Evergreen. 

'''Do NOT:'''
* Drop this camera
* Submerge this camera in water
* Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
* Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
* Store this camera in excessive cold
* Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
* Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
* Use excessive physical force
* Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-01-parts.png|XT Parts
File:Rebelx-02-parts.png|XT Parts
File:Rebelx-03-lcdpanel.png|XT LCD Panel
File:Rebelx-04-viewfinder.png|XT Viewfinder
File:Rebelx-05-modedial.png|XT Mode Dial
</gallery>

=== Installing & Removing Battery ===
* To open the battery compartment, slide the compartment lever in the direction of the back of the camera as shown by the arrow.
* Insert the battery with the power contacts pointed downward until the battery locks into place.
* Close the cover and slide the lever back in place as indicated by the arrow until it snaps shut.
* Do not charge the battery for 24 hours or more! 

'''About the Battery's Life''' 

When the camera is ON, the battery level will be indicated in 1 of 3 levels:
* Battery level is OK
* Battery level is low
* Battery must be recharged 

Tip: To save battery power, you may set the Auto-off function of the menu to turn the camera off automatically.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-06-battery.png|XT Installing Battery
File:Rebelx-07-battery.png|XT Removing Battery
</gallery>

=== Attaching & Detaching Lens ===
* '''To attach the lens,''' align the EF-S lens with the camera's white EF-S lens mount index and turn the lens in a clockwise direction as shown by the arrow until the lens clicks into place.
* When attaching a lens other than an EF-S lens, align the lens with the red EF lens index mark.
* '''To detach the lens,''' while pressing the lens release button, turn the lens in a counter-clockwise direction.
* Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. 
 

When attaching or detaching the lens, '''take care to prevent dust from entering the camer through the lens mount.''' Removing the lens can cause debris to get inside the camera making the camera highly susceptible to serious damage. If the lens is removed, avoid putting your fingers inside the camera. If the mirror, or any other part of the inside of this camera gets dirty, please bring it back to Media Loan so that a qualified staff member can service the camera.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-08-lens.png|XT Lens
</gallery>

=== Installing & Removing CF Card ===
* To insert the CF Card open the compartment cover.
* Insert the CF Card until the CF Card's eject button pops up.
* Close the cover and slide it back in place as indicated by the arrow until the cover snaps shut. 
 

Unless you plan to put the CF card into a card reader, please do not remove it. Do not bend the card or put the card into the card slot backwards.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-09-cfcard.png|Install Card
File:Rebelx-10-cfcard.png|Remove Card
</gallery>

=== Dioptric Adjustment ===
* Turn the dioptric adjustment knob left or right until the AF points in the viewfinder look sharp.
* By adjusting the diopter to suit your eyesight, you can see a sharp viewfinder image even without eyeglasses.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-19-dioptric.png|XT Dioptric Adjustment
</gallery>

=== Menu Operations ===

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-12-dial.png|XT
File:Rebelx-13-crosskeys.png|XT
File:Rebelx-14-menuops.png|XT
File:Rebelx-15-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-16-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-17-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-18-restore.png|XT
</gallery>

=== Manual Focusing ===
*Set the lens focus mode switch to MF and focus the subject by turning the lens focusing ring.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-25-manualfocus.png|XT Manual Focus
</gallery>

=== Auto-Focusing ===
* On the lens, set the focus mode to AF. If the lens is set to MF, auto-focus will not be possible.
* Setting the mode dial to Full Auto will set the following:
** The AF mode will set to AI Focus AF*.
** The drive mode will set to Single Shooting.
** The Metering Mode will set to Evaluate Metering.
* AI Focus AF wil automatically change to AI Servo AF to track a subject that's moving. 
 

Auto-Focus can fail to achieve focus (the focus confirmation light blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
* Low-contrast subjects.
* Solid-color walls.
* Subject in low light.
* Extremely backlit and reflective subjects, e.g. reflection from car window.
* Overlapping near and far objects, e.g. animal in a cage.
* Repetitive patterns, e.g. skyscraper windows.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-11-shutterbutton.png|XT Shutter Bug
</gallery>

=== Selecting the Metering Mode ===
* The camera has three metering modes; Evaluate, Partial and Center-weighted average metering.
* Evaluate Metering is the camera's standard metering mode suited for most subjects even under backlit conditions.
* During manual focusing, evaluative metering is based on the center AF point.
* Partial Metering is effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting.
* Center-weighted Average Metering is weighted at the center and then averaged for the entire scene.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-26-meteringmode.png|XT Metering Mode
</gallery>

=== Exposure ===
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-30-manualexp.png|Manual Exposure
File:Rebelx-31-manualexp.png|Manual Exposure
File:Rebelx-32-expcontrol.png|Exposure Compensation
</gallery>

=== Selecting the Drive Mode ===
* Look at the LCD panel and press the button to select mode.
** Single shooting - When you press the shutter button completely, one shot will be taken.
** Continuous Shooting - While you press the shutter button completely, shots will be taken continuously according to speed allowed by current settings.
** Self Timer/Remote Control - Press the shutter button completely, a beeper will sound, the self-timer lamp will start blinking and the shot will be taken about 10 sec. later.

=== Setting the White Balance ===
Normally, the white balance is set automatically, but if natural-looking colors cannot be obtained, you can set the white balance manually to suit the respective light source. Please be considerate of other users and return the white balance setting back to automatic (AWB).
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-22-wb.png|XT White Balance
File:Rebelx-23-wb.png|XT White Balance
File:Rebelx-24-wb.png|XT White Balance
</gallery>

=== Setting the ISO Speed ===
* The ISO speed is set automatically within ISO 100-400.
* You can set the ISO speed to [100] [200] [400] [800] [1600] only in creative modes.
* '''Tip:''' At higher ISO speeds and higher ambient temperatures, the image will look more grainy. Also, high temperatures, high ISO speeds, or long exposures may cause irregular colors in the image.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-21-isospeed.png|XT ISO Speed
</gallery>

=== Advanced Operations ===
With the Creative Zone modes, you can set the desired shutter speed or aperture value depending which mode is currently selected.
* P - Program Auto Exposure is a general purpose shooting mode. The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to suit the subject's brightness.
* Tv - Shutter-priority AE is used to set the shutter speed. The camera will automatically set the aperture value to suit the subject's brightness.
** Turn the shutter dial to change priority settings. A faster shutter speed can freeze the motion of a fast-moving subject.
* Av - Aperture-priority AE lets you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to suit the subject brightness.
* M - Manual Exposure lets you manually set both the shutter speed and aperture value as desired, use Av +/ button to toggle between settings.
* A-Dep - Automatic Depth-of-Field AE is used to obtain a wide depth of field automatically between a near subject and far subject. It is effective for group photos or landscapes.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-27-TV-shutterpriority.png|XT TV
File:Rebelx-28-AV-AperturePriority.png|XT AV
File:Rebelx-29-dofpreview.png|XT Depth of Field Preview
</gallery>

=== Image-Recording Quality Settings ===
'''Image File Size & CF Card Capacity''' 

'''Tip:''' The RAW file setting assumes that the image will undergo post-processing with a personal computer. Special software such as Adobe Bridge or Photoshop is required to view the images or edit them for printing. Try and test before assuming your setup will work for major projects.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-20-imageqlty.png|XT Image Quality
</gallery>

=== Playback ===
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-33-playback.png|XT Playback
File:Rebelx-34-playback.png|XT Playback
</gallery>

=== Displaying the Images on a TV ===
* Connect the camera to the TV.
** Open the camera's terminal cover.
** Use the video cable to connect the camera's video out terminal to the TV monitor's VIDEO IN terminal.
** Turn on the TV and switch the TV's line input to Video IN.
** Turn the power switch to ON
** Press the PLAY button on camera back.
** The image will appear on the TV screen. (The camera's LCD monitor will display nothing.)
** After you finish set the power switch to OFF, turn off the TV and disconnect the cable.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-35-tvdisply.png|XT
File:Rebelx-36-tvdisply.png|XT
</gallery>

=== Transferring Images to a Computer ===
(Using Windows Vista, XP or Mac OSX (v 10.3/10.4)
* Plug camera USB cable into Camera USB port.
* Plug other end of cable into an available USB port.
* Turn camera on and wait follow on-screen prompts.
'''Note:''' It may take a few minutes for the initial install before you can transfer your photos.

'''Disconnecting the Camera''' 

Make sure no information is being transferred (Red light is not flashing and LCD does not display "BUSY"). Then unplug the USB cable and turn off the camera.
Please note: For some older versions of Mac OS you must unmount the camera drive by dragging it to the trash bin before disconnecting the USB cable or turning the camera off.

=== Rebel XSi ===
<gallery>
File:XSi-Head-On.jpg|
File:XSi-Back-View.jpg|
File:XSi-Top-View.jpg|
File:XSi-Flash.jpg|
</gallery>
'''Differences from the XTi/XT'''
* The Rebel XSi introduces a number of new features, however, to most users there are only a few updates to be aware of. Liveview, Spot metering and a few moved buttons (see diagram, right) are the more relevant changes made.
* Live View
** It is possible to view a real-time image through the LCD screen by using the Live View function. Live View only works in the creative zone modes, so make sure to set the shooting mode accordingly.
** To turn on Live View, open the camera menu and select the Tools 2 menu (tools icon with 2 dots). Select “Live View Function Settings” and press SET.
** Select “Live View Shoot” and press SET.
** Select “Enable” and press SET again.
** Press the MENU button to exit.
** To display the Live View image, press SET and the image should appear on the LCD. This image will reflect the actual brightness of the captured image.
* Spot metering
** WIth the new XSi you can now choose spot metering, which uses a large circular area for metering in the center of the viewfinder.

=== Trouble Shooting ===
This is to help you navigate through error messages and simple problems. '''Remember, never try to force the camera!''' If this guide does not help you with your problem, please return the camera to Media Loan and describe the issue to a staff member.
* '''Only the icon blinks on the top of LCD panel'''
** The battery is almost exhausted.
* '''No images can be shot nor recorded'''
** The CF card is not properly inserted.
** The CF card is full.
** The battery is exhausted.
** You did not focus perfectly (When focused, the focus confirmation light in the viewfinder blinks.
** Settings are incorrect for exposure.
* '''The LCD panel does not display a clear image'''
** Bring camera back to Media Loan for servicing.
* '''The image is out of focus'''
** The Lens focus mode switch is set to MF (manual).
** The camera was shaken when the picture was taken or shutter speed was not fast enough for hand held shooting.

[[category:Media Loan]]

File:XSi-Back-View.jpg

2013-08-26T21:15:42Z

Kisaar24: Kisaar24 uploaded a new version of "File:XSi-Back-View.jpg"

Canon Rebel XSi Operating Guide

2013-08-26T21:11:06Z

Kisaar24:

'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and [[Canon Rebel T1i/T2i Operating Guide]] and complete the written portion of the [[Canon Rebel Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/photo-manual-rebelxt.pdf Rebel XT Manual] 

[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/photo_manual_rebelxsi.pdf Rebel XSi Manual]

=== Caring for Media Loan Equipment ===
Media Loan has a limited number of Canon Rebel XT and XSi cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure it's long-term use at Evergreen. 

'''Do NOT:'''
* Drop this camera
* Submerge this camera in water
* Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!
* Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car
* Store this camera in excessive cold
* Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera
* Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals
* Use excessive physical force
* Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-01-parts.png|XT Parts
File:Rebelx-02-parts.png|XT Parts
File:Rebelx-03-lcdpanel.png|XT LCD Panel
File:Rebelx-04-viewfinder.png|XT Viewfinder
File:Rebelx-05-modedial.png|XT Mode Dial
</gallery>

=== Installing & Removing Battery ===
* To open the battery compartment, slide the compartment lever in the direction of the back of the camera as shown by the arrow.
* Insert the battery with the power contacts pointed downward until the battery locks into place.
* Close the cover and slide the lever back in place as indicated by the arrow until it snaps shut.
* Do not charge the battery for 24 hours or more! 

'''About the Battery's Life''' 

When the camera is ON, the battery level will be indicated in 1 of 3 levels:
* Battery level is OK
* Battery level is low
* Battery must be recharged 

Tip: To save battery power, you may set the Auto-off function of the menu to turn the camera off automatically.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-06-battery.png|XT Installing Battery
File:Rebelx-07-battery.png|XT Removing Battery
</gallery>

=== Attaching & Detaching Lens ===
* '''To attach the lens,''' align the EF-S lens with the camera's white EF-S lens mount index and turn the lens in a clockwise direction as shown by the arrow until the lens clicks into place.
* When attaching a lens other than an EF-S lens, align the lens with the red EF lens index mark.
* '''To detach the lens,''' while pressing the lens release button, turn the lens in a counter-clockwise direction.
* Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. 
 

When attaching or detaching the lens, '''take care to prevent dust from entering the camer through the lens mount.''' Removing the lens can cause debris to get inside the camera making the camera highly susceptible to serious damage. If the lens is removed, avoid putting your fingers inside the camera. If the mirror, or any other part of the inside of this camera gets dirty, please bring it back to Media Loan so that a qualified staff member can service the camera.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-08-lens.png|XT Lens
</gallery>

=== Installing & Removing CF Card ===
* To insert the CF Card open the compartment cover.
* Insert the CF Card until the CF Card's eject button pops up.
* Close the cover and slide it back in place as indicated by the arrow until the cover snaps shut. 
 

Unless you plan to put the CF card into a card reader, please do not remove it. Do not bend the card or put the card into the card slot backwards.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-09-cfcard.png|Install Card
File:Rebelx-10-cfcard.png|Remove Card
</gallery>

=== Dioptric Adjustment ===
* Turn the dioptric adjustment knob left or right until the AF points in the viewfinder look sharp.
* By adjusting the diopter to suit your eyesight, you can see a sharp viewfinder image even without eyeglasses.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-19-dioptric.png|XT Dioptric Adjustment
</gallery>

=== Menu Operations ===

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-12-dial.png|XT
File:Rebelx-13-crosskeys.png|XT
File:Rebelx-14-menuops.png|XT
File:Rebelx-15-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-16-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-17-menu.png|XT
File:Rebelx-18-restore.png|XT
</gallery>

=== Manual Focusing ===
*Set the lens focus mode switch to MF and focus the subject by turning the lens focusing ring.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-25-manualfocus.png|XT Manual Focus
</gallery>

=== Auto-Focusing ===
* On the lens, set the focus mode to AF. If the lens is set to MF, auto-focus will not be possible.
* Setting the mode dial to Full Auto will set the following:
** The AF mode will set to AI Focus AF*.
** The drive mode will set to Single Shooting.
** The Metering Mode will set to Evaluate Metering.
* AI Focus AF wil automatically change to AI Servo AF to track a subject that's moving. 
 

Auto-Focus can fail to achieve focus (the focus confirmation light blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
* Low-contrast subjects.
* Solid-color walls.
* Subject in low light.
* Extremely backlit and reflective subjects, e.g. reflection from car window.
* Overlapping near and far objects, e.g. animal in a cage.
* Repetitive patterns, e.g. skyscraper windows.

<gallery>
File:Rebelx-11-shutterbutton.png|XT Shutter Bug
</gallery>

=== Selecting the Metering Mode ===
* The camera has three metering modes; Evaluate, Partial and Center-weighted average metering.
* Evaluate Metering is the camera's standard metering mode suited for most subjects even under backlit conditions.
* During manual focusing, evaluative metering is based on the center AF point.
* Partial Metering is effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting.
* Center-weighted Average Metering is weighted at the center and then averaged for the entire scene.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-26-meteringmode.png|XT Metering Mode
</gallery>

=== Exposure ===
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-30-manualexp.png|Manual Exposure
File:Rebelx-31-manualexp.png|Manual Exposure
File:Rebelx-32-expcontrol.png|Exposure Compensation
</gallery>

=== Selecting the Drive Mode ===
* Look at the LCD panel and press the button to select mode.
** Single shooting - When you press the shutter button completely, one shot will be taken.
** Continuous Shooting - While you press the shutter button completely, shots will be taken continuously according to speed allowed by current settings.
** Self Timer/Remote Control - Press the shutter button completely, a beeper will sound, the self-timer lamp will start blinking and the shot will be taken about 10 sec. later.

=== Setting the White Balance ===
Normally, the white balance is set automatically, but if natural-looking colors cannot be obtained, you can set the white balance manually to suit the respective light source. Please be considerate of other users and return the white balance setting back to automatic (AWB).
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-22-wb.png|XT White Balance
File:Rebelx-23-wb.png|XT White Balance
File:Rebelx-24-wb.png|XT White Balance
</gallery>

=== Setting the ISO Speed ===
* The ISO speed is set automatically within ISO 100-400.
* You can set the ISO speed to [100] [200] [400] [800] [1600] only in creative modes.
* '''Tip:''' At higher ISO speeds and higher ambient temperatures, the image will look more grainy. Also, high temperatures, high ISO speeds, or long exposures may cause irregular colors in the image.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-21-isospeed.png|XT ISO Speed
</gallery>

=== Advanced Operations ===
With the Creative Zone modes, you can set the desired shutter speed or aperture value depending which mode is currently selected.
* P - Program Auto Exposure is a general purpose shooting mode. The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to suit the subject's brightness.
* Tv - Shutter-priority AE is used to set the shutter speed. The camera will automatically set the aperture value to suit the subject's brightness.
** Turn the shutter dial to change priority settings. A faster shutter speed can freeze the motion of a fast-moving subject.
* Av - Aperture-priority AE lets you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to suit the subject brightness.
* M - Manual Exposure lets you manually set both the shutter speed and aperture value as desired, use Av +/ button to toggle between settings.
* A-Dep - Automatic Depth-of-Field AE is used to obtain a wide depth of field automatically between a near subject and far subject. It is effective for group photos or landscapes.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-27-TV-shutterpriority.png|XT TV
File:Rebelx-28-AV-AperturePriority.png|XT AV
File:Rebelx-29-dofpreview.png|XT Depth of Field Preview
</gallery>

=== Image-Recording Quality Settings ===
'''Image File Size & CF Card Capacity''' 

'''Tip:''' The RAW file setting assumes that the image will undergo post-processing with a personal computer. Special software such as Adobe Bridge or Photoshop is required to view the images or edit them for printing. Try and test before assuming your setup will work for major projects.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-20-imageqlty.png|XT Image Quality
</gallery>

=== Playback ===
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-33-playback.png|XT Playback
File:Rebelx-34-playback.png|XT Playback
</gallery>

=== Displaying the Images on a TV ===
* Connect the camera to the TV.
** Open the camera's terminal cover.
** Use the video cable to connect the camera's video out terminal to the TV monitor's VIDEO IN terminal.
** Turn on the TV and switch the TV's line input to Video IN.
** Turn the power switch to ON
** Press the PLAY button on camera back.
** The image will appear on the TV screen. (The camera's LCD monitor will display nothing.)
** After you finish set the power switch to OFF, turn off the TV and disconnect the cable.
<gallery>
File:Rebelx-35-tvdisply.png|XT
File:Rebelx-36-tvdisply.png|XT
</gallery>

=== Transferring Images to a Computer ===
(Using Windows Vista, XP or Mac OSX (v 10.3/10.4)
* Plug camera USB cable into Camera USB port.
* Plug other end of cable into an available USB port.
* Turn camera on and wait follow on-screen prompts.
'''Note:''' It may take a few minutes for the initial install before you can transfer your photos.

'''Disconnecting the Camera''' 

Make sure no information is being transferred (Red light is not flashing and LCD does not display "BUSY"). Then unplug the USB cable and turn off the camera.
Please note: For some older versions of Mac OS you must unmount the camera drive by dragging it to the trash bin before disconnecting the USB cable or turning the camera off.

=== Rebel XSi ===
'''Differences from the XTi/XT'''
* The Rebel XSi introduces a number of new features, however, to most users there are only a few updates to be aware of. Liveview, Spot metering and a few moved buttons (see diagram, right) are the more relevant changes made.
* Live View
** It is possible to view a real-time image through the LCD screen by using the Live View function. Live View only works in the creative zone modes, so make sure to set the shooting mode accordingly.
** To turn on Live View, open the camera menu and select the Tools 2 menu (tools icon with 2 dots). Select “Live View Function Settings” and press SET.
** Select “Live View Shoot” and press SET.
** Select “Enable” and press SET again.
** Press the MENU button to exit.
** To display the Live View image, press SET and the image should appear on the LCD. This image will reflect the actual brightness of the captured image.
* Spot metering
** WIth the new XSi you can now choose spot metering, which uses a large circular area for metering in the center of the viewfinder.

=== Trouble Shooting ===
This is to help you navigate through error messages and simple problems. '''Remember, never try to force the camera!''' If this guide does not help you with your problem, please return the camera to Media Loan and describe the issue to a staff member.
* '''Only the icon blinks on the top of LCD panel'''
** The battery is almost exhausted.
* '''No images can be shot nor recorded'''
** The CF card is not properly inserted.
** The CF card is full.
** The battery is exhausted.
** You did not focus perfectly (When focused, the focus confirmation light in the viewfinder blinks.
** Settings are incorrect for exposure.
* '''The LCD panel does not display a clear image'''
** Bring camera back to Media Loan for servicing.
* '''The image is out of focus'''
** The Lens focus mode switch is set to MF (manual).
** The camera was shaken when the picture was taken or shutter speed was not fast enough for hand held shooting.

[[category:Media Loan]]

Digital Voice Recorders Quick Guide

2013-08-26T20:58:08Z

Kisaar24: /* Sony RDS */

'''Great for recording conversations and lectures. No proficiency required!'''
OLYMPUS WS100 RDV (MONO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users 
OLYMPUS DS-30 RDO (STEREO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users 
SONY RDS (STEREO, MP3 files) - recommended for Mac users 

===Suggested Recording Checklist for all Devices===
*Make a test recording prior to your scheduled interview to make sure you are comfortable using the recorder. Start with fresh batteries.
*Select a controlled and quiet recording location. Avoid noisy public locations (like restaurants, or areas near a road). If possible, eliminate background noises (turn off stereos, TV’s, fans, air circulation vents). A room with carpeting and furniture will typically sound better than one with hard floors (too much echo).
*Check record levels. Improve the quality of the recording by adjusting the mic placement either closer, or further away from the sound source. Wear headphones to monitor volume levels as well watch the volume meters on the recorder. Ideal recordings will have clearly audible audio, while not being too loud so that it is distorted (going into "the red" on the audio recorder meters). What you hear is what you get. Shock mounts and stands are great to reduce mic handling noise.
*Confirm you are recording. Make sure the record light comes on, that the clock numbers are counting and audio levels are moving up and down.
*Tag the recording. Start each recording by stating the date, time, location, your name, and the name of your interviewee for proper archiving and cataloging of this work.
===Steps for Saving Files===
*Copy files from the audio recorder to a computer as you would from a USB drive. Protect the privacy of your recordings by deleting all files on the recorder before returning equipment to Media Loan.
*Backup the original audio files from the recorder to your program network drive. DO NOT USE SPECIAL CHARACTERS IN FILE NAMES (‘!#$*&%).
*When working with files in an audio editing program like Audacity, create a copy of the originals to be able to revert back if necessary.
===Connecting Recorders to a PC/MAC===
*Before connecting one of the PC compatible devices, make sure power switch is OFF and the display is off.
*Then plug it into an open USB port. Computers will recognize the recorder as a removable disk drive.
*Files are saved onto the recorder in WMA format on Olympus recorders (a program which can read WMA files is required) and in lettered folders corresponding to the folder in which you recorded.
*When connected the recorder display will read “PC” When transferring data, the display will read “BUSY”. DO NOT disconnect the recorder when either message is displayed on the screen.
*BEFORE DETACHING FROM COMPUTER - Remove the detachable device (Eject in Mac OS) and make sure the display is turned off.
===Olympus WS100 RDV===
<gallery>
File:WS-100-Head-On.jpg|
File:WS-100-Back-View.jpg|
File:WS-100-Side-View.jpg|
File:WS-100-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
====Basic Menu Operations====
Press and hold menu for 1 second or longer while recorder is stopped.
Press FF or REW to browse menu options, and PLAY to select an option or to close the menu hit the STOP button at any point.
====Recording====
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder
# Press the REC button to start recording
# Press STOP button to stop recording
====Playback====
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder
# Press the FF or REW to choose the file you want to play
# Press PLAY button to start playback
# Press VOL (+) or VOL (-) button to select proper volume (Between 1-30)
Helpful Tip: To change the playback speed press PLAY to toggle between regular, slow, and fast.
====Erasing Files====
# To erase an individual file press the FOLDER button to choose a folder
# Press the FF or REW button to choose the file you wnt to erase
# Press the ERASE button for less than 3 seconds ‘
# Press the ERASE button again (“DONE” blinks for two seconds and the deletion will be complete)
====Tips====
*When using headphones while recoding or to listen to a recoding, the volume can be adjusted by pressing VOL (- +)
*To Pause press the REC button during recording; PAUSE will appear on the display and the recoding lamp flashes
*If a external microphone is desired, connect to headphone jack. Recommended external mics for this device are omnidirectional sound grabber, lavalier (MOT/MOE)
====Possible Issues====
*If full appears on the screen the device is out of memory. Erase unwanted files to make more room for new recordings.
*If recorder is stopped for 5 minutes, it will go on standby and the display will shut off. Recorder will also stop if left un-paused for 60 seconds. To exit standby mode press any button.

===Olympus DS-30 RDO===
<gallery>
File:DS-30-Head-On.jpg|
File:DS-30-Bottom-View.jpg|
File:DS-30-Side-View.jpg|
File:DS-30-Side-View-Other.jpg|
</gallery>
====Basic Menu Operations====
* Press the MENU button for 1 second or longer to open the menu.
* Menu items can be set during a recording or playback.
* Press the + or – button to scroll through the menu. Press the OK button to change the setting of the selected item. Press the OK button to complete the setup screen.
* If the REW button is pressed, the setting will be canceled and it will return to the menu. Press the STOP button to close the menu.
====Power/Hold====
* Push the POWER/HOLD button up to initiate hold and down to turn recorder on. Push POWER/HOLD button down again to turn recorder off.
* When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause recording until hold is turned off.
====Recording/Playback====
# Press FOLDER button to select folder to record into. Use the +/- buttons to navigate to different folders.
# Once folder is selected, press the REC button the the right side to start recording .To pause, press REC button again.
# To play the recording back, select file and presss PLAY button the right side of the recorder. This is also where the STOP button is located.
====Recording Modes====
While the recorder is stopped, open the menu. Select “Rec Mode”. Choose from “ST XQ”, “ST HQ”, “HQ”, “SP” and “LP”.
====Erasing Files====
Select file within folder and press the orange ERASE button on the bottom left.
====Tips====
* Mic sensitivity allows you to choose three different settings. Slide the MIC SENSE switch and select “LECTURE”, “CONF.”, “DICT.”. Lecture is the highest recording quality suitable for conferences with large crowds, or recording at a distance. Conference is suitable for meetings with small amount of people. Diction is the lowest recording sensitivity suitable for dictation.
* Voice filter is a function to cut low and high frequency tones during normal, fast, or slow playback, and enables clear audio playback.
* Noise cancel is a setting to use if audio is difficult to understand because of noisy surroundings. Menu options are high, low, and off and can be set while stopped or during playback.

===Sony RDS===
<gallery>
File:Sony-Front-View.jpg|
File:Sony-Back-View.jpg|
File:Sony-Side-View.jpg|
File:Sony-Side-View-Other.jpg|
</gallery>
====Basic Menu Functions====
# Press the MENU/FOLDER button to open folder list.
# Use FF/REW buttons on side to scroll through list.
# Use the PLAY/STOP button on the side to select folder.
* HOLD button is on back of recorder.
** The HOLD button is also the POWER switch. Use it to turn the recorder on and off.
** When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause.
* Recording modes can be altered by using the mEnu and selecting either LOW or HIGH.
====Recording/Playback====
# Select folder to record into.
# When ready to record, press red circular button on the right side of the recorder.
# To pause recording, press the REC red button once again.
# To play back recoding, hit the STOP button on the side of the recorder which will put you back at the folder. Press the PLAY button to play back recording.
====Erasing Files====
# To erase files, select folder and file. Press the small red circular button on the left side to erase.
# Hold button down for 1 second or longer and file will be deleted.
====Tips====
* DPC: When you slide the DPC (Digital PItch Control) switch to “ON”, you can adjust the playback speed between +200% and -75% of normal speed in the menu. The message is played back in natural tones by this function.
** Slide the DPC switch to ON.
** Press and hold MENU button to enter menu. Use REW/FF buttons to select DPC then press PLAY. Press STOP to exit.
** Slide switch to OFF poition to return to normal playback.
* NOISE CUT: When NOISE CUT switch is set to ON, the distortion of very low frequencies which are outside the human voice range is reduced, therefore you can hear the human voice more clearly. However, when you are using the built in speaker this function is not available.
** Slide the NOISE CUT button to the ON/OFF position.

[[category:Media Loan]]

Digital Voice Recorders Quick Guide

2013-08-26T20:57:29Z

Kisaar24: /* Sony RDS */

'''Great for recording conversations and lectures. No proficiency required!'''
OLYMPUS WS100 RDV (MONO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users 
OLYMPUS DS-30 RDO (STEREO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users 
SONY RDS (STEREO, MP3 files) - recommended for Mac users 

===Suggested Recording Checklist for all Devices===
*Make a test recording prior to your scheduled interview to make sure you are comfortable using the recorder. Start with fresh batteries.
*Select a controlled and quiet recording location. Avoid noisy public locations (like restaurants, or areas near a road). If possible, eliminate background noises (turn off stereos, TV’s, fans, air circulation vents). A room with carpeting and furniture will typically sound better than one with hard floors (too much echo).
*Check record levels. Improve the quality of the recording by adjusting the mic placement either closer, or further away from the sound source. Wear headphones to monitor volume levels as well watch the volume meters on the recorder. Ideal recordings will have clearly audible audio, while not being too loud so that it is distorted (going into "the red" on the audio recorder meters). What you hear is what you get. Shock mounts and stands are great to reduce mic handling noise.
*Confirm you are recording. Make sure the record light comes on, that the clock numbers are counting and audio levels are moving up and down.
*Tag the recording. Start each recording by stating the date, time, location, your name, and the name of your interviewee for proper archiving and cataloging of this work.
===Steps for Saving Files===
*Copy files from the audio recorder to a computer as you would from a USB drive. Protect the privacy of your recordings by deleting all files on the recorder before returning equipment to Media Loan.
*Backup the original audio files from the recorder to your program network drive. DO NOT USE SPECIAL CHARACTERS IN FILE NAMES (‘!#$*&%).
*When working with files in an audio editing program like Audacity, create a copy of the originals to be able to revert back if necessary.
===Connecting Recorders to a PC/MAC===
*Before connecting one of the PC compatible devices, make sure power switch is OFF and the display is off.
*Then plug it into an open USB port. Computers will recognize the recorder as a removable disk drive.
*Files are saved onto the recorder in WMA format on Olympus recorders (a program which can read WMA files is required) and in lettered folders corresponding to the folder in which you recorded.
*When connected the recorder display will read “PC” When transferring data, the display will read “BUSY”. DO NOT disconnect the recorder when either message is displayed on the screen.
*BEFORE DETACHING FROM COMPUTER - Remove the detachable device (Eject in Mac OS) and make sure the display is turned off.
===Olympus WS100 RDV===
<gallery>
File:WS-100-Head-On.jpg|
File:WS-100-Back-View.jpg|
File:WS-100-Side-View.jpg|
File:WS-100-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
====Basic Menu Operations====
Press and hold menu for 1 second or longer while recorder is stopped.
Press FF or REW to browse menu options, and PLAY to select an option or to close the menu hit the STOP button at any point.
====Recording====
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder
# Press the REC button to start recording
# Press STOP button to stop recording
====Playback====
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder
# Press the FF or REW to choose the file you want to play
# Press PLAY button to start playback
# Press VOL (+) or VOL (-) button to select proper volume (Between 1-30)
Helpful Tip: To change the playback speed press PLAY to toggle between regular, slow, and fast.
====Erasing Files====
# To erase an individual file press the FOLDER button to choose a folder
# Press the FF or REW button to choose the file you wnt to erase
# Press the ERASE button for less than 3 seconds ‘
# Press the ERASE button again (“DONE” blinks for two seconds and the deletion will be complete)
====Tips====
*When using headphones while recoding or to listen to a recoding, the volume can be adjusted by pressing VOL (- +)
*To Pause press the REC button during recording; PAUSE will appear on the display and the recoding lamp flashes
*If a external microphone is desired, connect to headphone jack. Recommended external mics for this device are omnidirectional sound grabber, lavalier (MOT/MOE)
====Possible Issues====
*If full appears on the screen the device is out of memory. Erase unwanted files to make more room for new recordings.
*If recorder is stopped for 5 minutes, it will go on standby and the display will shut off. Recorder will also stop if left un-paused for 60 seconds. To exit standby mode press any button.

===Olympus DS-30 RDO===
<gallery>
File:DS-30-Head-On.jpg|
File:DS-30-Bottom-View.jpg|
File:DS-30-Side-View.jpg|
File:DS-30-Side-View-Other.jpg|
</gallery>
====Basic Menu Operations====
* Press the MENU button for 1 second or longer to open the menu.
* Menu items can be set during a recording or playback.
* Press the + or – button to scroll through the menu. Press the OK button to change the setting of the selected item. Press the OK button to complete the setup screen.
* If the REW button is pressed, the setting will be canceled and it will return to the menu. Press the STOP button to close the menu.
====Power/Hold====
* Push the POWER/HOLD button up to initiate hold and down to turn recorder on. Push POWER/HOLD button down again to turn recorder off.
* When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause recording until hold is turned off.
====Recording/Playback====
# Press FOLDER button to select folder to record into. Use the +/- buttons to navigate to different folders.
# Once folder is selected, press the REC button the the right side to start recording .To pause, press REC button again.
# To play the recording back, select file and presss PLAY button the right side of the recorder. This is also where the STOP button is located.
====Recording Modes====
While the recorder is stopped, open the menu. Select “Rec Mode”. Choose from “ST XQ”, “ST HQ”, “HQ”, “SP” and “LP”.
====Erasing Files====
Select file within folder and press the orange ERASE button on the bottom left.
====Tips====
* Mic sensitivity allows you to choose three different settings. Slide the MIC SENSE switch and select “LECTURE”, “CONF.”, “DICT.”. Lecture is the highest recording quality suitable for conferences with large crowds, or recording at a distance. Conference is suitable for meetings with small amount of people. Diction is the lowest recording sensitivity suitable for dictation.
* Voice filter is a function to cut low and high frequency tones during normal, fast, or slow playback, and enables clear audio playback.
* Noise cancel is a setting to use if audio is difficult to understand because of noisy surroundings. Menu options are high, low, and off and can be set while stopped or during playback.

===Sony RDS===
<gallery>
File:Sony-Front-View.jpg|
File:Sony-Head-On.jpg|
File:Sony-Side-View.jpg|
File:Sony-Side-View-Other.jpg|
</gallery>
====Basic Menu Functions====
# Press the MENU/FOLDER button to open folder list.
# Use FF/REW buttons on side to scroll through list.
# Use the PLAY/STOP button on the side to select folder.
* HOLD button is on back of recorder.
** The HOLD button is also the POWER switch. Use it to turn the recorder on and off.
** When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause.
* Recording modes can be altered by using the mEnu and selecting either LOW or HIGH.
====Recording/Playback====
# Select folder to record into.
# When ready to record, press red circular button on the right side of the recorder.
# To pause recording, press the REC red button once again.
# To play back recoding, hit the STOP button on the side of the recorder which will put you back at the folder. Press the PLAY button to play back recording.
====Erasing Files====
# To erase files, select folder and file. Press the small red circular button on the left side to erase.
# Hold button down for 1 second or longer and file will be deleted.
====Tips====
* DPC: When you slide the DPC (Digital PItch Control) switch to “ON”, you can adjust the playback speed between +200% and -75% of normal speed in the menu. The message is played back in natural tones by this function.
** Slide the DPC switch to ON.
** Press and hold MENU button to enter menu. Use REW/FF buttons to select DPC then press PLAY. Press STOP to exit.
** Slide switch to OFF poition to return to normal playback.
* NOISE CUT: When NOISE CUT switch is set to ON, the distortion of very low frequencies which are outside the human voice range is reduced, therefore you can hear the human voice more clearly. However, when you are using the built in speaker this function is not available.
** Slide the NOISE CUT button to the ON/OFF position.

[[category:Media Loan]]

Digital Voice Recorders Quick Guide

2013-08-26T20:54:49Z

Kisaar24: /* Olympus DS-30 RDO */

'''Great for recording conversations and lectures. No proficiency required!'''
OLYMPUS WS100 RDV (MONO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users 
OLYMPUS DS-30 RDO (STEREO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users 
SONY RDS (STEREO, MP3 files) - recommended for Mac users 

===Suggested Recording Checklist for all Devices===
*Make a test recording prior to your scheduled interview to make sure you are comfortable using the recorder. Start with fresh batteries.
*Select a controlled and quiet recording location. Avoid noisy public locations (like restaurants, or areas near a road). If possible, eliminate background noises (turn off stereos, TV’s, fans, air circulation vents). A room with carpeting and furniture will typically sound better than one with hard floors (too much echo).
*Check record levels. Improve the quality of the recording by adjusting the mic placement either closer, or further away from the sound source. Wear headphones to monitor volume levels as well watch the volume meters on the recorder. Ideal recordings will have clearly audible audio, while not being too loud so that it is distorted (going into "the red" on the audio recorder meters). What you hear is what you get. Shock mounts and stands are great to reduce mic handling noise.
*Confirm you are recording. Make sure the record light comes on, that the clock numbers are counting and audio levels are moving up and down.
*Tag the recording. Start each recording by stating the date, time, location, your name, and the name of your interviewee for proper archiving and cataloging of this work.
===Steps for Saving Files===
*Copy files from the audio recorder to a computer as you would from a USB drive. Protect the privacy of your recordings by deleting all files on the recorder before returning equipment to Media Loan.
*Backup the original audio files from the recorder to your program network drive. DO NOT USE SPECIAL CHARACTERS IN FILE NAMES (‘!#$*&%).
*When working with files in an audio editing program like Audacity, create a copy of the originals to be able to revert back if necessary.
===Connecting Recorders to a PC/MAC===
*Before connecting one of the PC compatible devices, make sure power switch is OFF and the display is off.
*Then plug it into an open USB port. Computers will recognize the recorder as a removable disk drive.
*Files are saved onto the recorder in WMA format on Olympus recorders (a program which can read WMA files is required) and in lettered folders corresponding to the folder in which you recorded.
*When connected the recorder display will read “PC” When transferring data, the display will read “BUSY”. DO NOT disconnect the recorder when either message is displayed on the screen.
*BEFORE DETACHING FROM COMPUTER - Remove the detachable device (Eject in Mac OS) and make sure the display is turned off.
===Olympus WS100 RDV===
<gallery>
File:WS-100-Head-On.jpg|
File:WS-100-Back-View.jpg|
File:WS-100-Side-View.jpg|
File:WS-100-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
====Basic Menu Operations====
Press and hold menu for 1 second or longer while recorder is stopped.
Press FF or REW to browse menu options, and PLAY to select an option or to close the menu hit the STOP button at any point.
====Recording====
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder
# Press the REC button to start recording
# Press STOP button to stop recording
====Playback====
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder
# Press the FF or REW to choose the file you want to play
# Press PLAY button to start playback
# Press VOL (+) or VOL (-) button to select proper volume (Between 1-30)
Helpful Tip: To change the playback speed press PLAY to toggle between regular, slow, and fast.
====Erasing Files====
# To erase an individual file press the FOLDER button to choose a folder
# Press the FF or REW button to choose the file you wnt to erase
# Press the ERASE button for less than 3 seconds ‘
# Press the ERASE button again (“DONE” blinks for two seconds and the deletion will be complete)
====Tips====
*When using headphones while recoding or to listen to a recoding, the volume can be adjusted by pressing VOL (- +)
*To Pause press the REC button during recording; PAUSE will appear on the display and the recoding lamp flashes
*If a external microphone is desired, connect to headphone jack. Recommended external mics for this device are omnidirectional sound grabber, lavalier (MOT/MOE)
====Possible Issues====
*If full appears on the screen the device is out of memory. Erase unwanted files to make more room for new recordings.
*If recorder is stopped for 5 minutes, it will go on standby and the display will shut off. Recorder will also stop if left un-paused for 60 seconds. To exit standby mode press any button.

===Olympus DS-30 RDO===
<gallery>
File:DS-30-Head-On.jpg|
File:DS-30-Bottom-View.jpg|
File:DS-30-Side-View.jpg|
File:DS-30-Side-View-Other.jpg|
</gallery>
====Basic Menu Operations====
* Press the MENU button for 1 second or longer to open the menu.
* Menu items can be set during a recording or playback.
* Press the + or – button to scroll through the menu. Press the OK button to change the setting of the selected item. Press the OK button to complete the setup screen.
* If the REW button is pressed, the setting will be canceled and it will return to the menu. Press the STOP button to close the menu.
====Power/Hold====
* Push the POWER/HOLD button up to initiate hold and down to turn recorder on. Push POWER/HOLD button down again to turn recorder off.
* When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause recording until hold is turned off.
====Recording/Playback====
# Press FOLDER button to select folder to record into. Use the +/- buttons to navigate to different folders.
# Once folder is selected, press the REC button the the right side to start recording .To pause, press REC button again.
# To play the recording back, select file and presss PLAY button the right side of the recorder. This is also where the STOP button is located.
====Recording Modes====
While the recorder is stopped, open the menu. Select “Rec Mode”. Choose from “ST XQ”, “ST HQ”, “HQ”, “SP” and “LP”.
====Erasing Files====
Select file within folder and press the orange ERASE button on the bottom left.
====Tips====
* Mic sensitivity allows you to choose three different settings. Slide the MIC SENSE switch and select “LECTURE”, “CONF.”, “DICT.”. Lecture is the highest recording quality suitable for conferences with large crowds, or recording at a distance. Conference is suitable for meetings with small amount of people. Diction is the lowest recording sensitivity suitable for dictation.
* Voice filter is a function to cut low and high frequency tones during normal, fast, or slow playback, and enables clear audio playback.
* Noise cancel is a setting to use if audio is difficult to understand because of noisy surroundings. Menu options are high, low, and off and can be set while stopped or during playback.

===Sony RDS===
====Basic Menu Functions====
# Press the MENU/FOLDER button to open folder list.
# Use FF/REW buttons on side to scroll through list.
# Use the PLAY/STOP button on the side to select folder.
* HOLD button is on back of recorder.
** The HOLD button is also the POWER switch. Use it to turn the recorder on and off.
** When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause.
* Recording modes can be altered by using the mEnu and selecting either LOW or HIGH.
====Recording/Playback====
# Select folder to record into.
# When ready to record, press red circular button on the right side of the recorder.
# To pause recording, press the REC red button once again.
# To play back recoding, hit the STOP button on the side of the recorder which will put you back at the folder. Press the PLAY button to play back recording.
====Erasing Files====
# To erase files, select folder and file. Press the small red circular button on the left side to erase.
# Hold button down for 1 second or longer and file will be deleted.
====Tips====
* DPC: When you slide the DPC (Digital PItch Control) switch to “ON”, you can adjust the playback speed between +200% and -75% of normal speed in the menu. The message is played back in natural tones by this function.
** Slide the DPC switch to ON.
** Press and hold MENU button to enter menu. Use REW/FF buttons to select DPC then press PLAY. Press STOP to exit.
** Slide switch to OFF poition to return to normal playback.
* NOISE CUT: When NOISE CUT switch is set to ON, the distortion of very low frequencies which are outside the human voice range is reduced, therefore you can hear the human voice more clearly. However, when you are using the built in speaker this function is not available.
** Slide the NOISE CUT button to the ON/OFF position.

[[category:Media Loan]]

Digital Voice Recorders Quick Guide

2013-08-26T20:52:44Z

Kisaar24: /* Olympus WS100 RDV */

'''Great for recording conversations and lectures. No proficiency required!'''
OLYMPUS WS100 RDV (MONO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users 
OLYMPUS DS-30 RDO (STEREO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users 
SONY RDS (STEREO, MP3 files) - recommended for Mac users 

===Suggested Recording Checklist for all Devices===
*Make a test recording prior to your scheduled interview to make sure you are comfortable using the recorder. Start with fresh batteries.
*Select a controlled and quiet recording location. Avoid noisy public locations (like restaurants, or areas near a road). If possible, eliminate background noises (turn off stereos, TV’s, fans, air circulation vents). A room with carpeting and furniture will typically sound better than one with hard floors (too much echo).
*Check record levels. Improve the quality of the recording by adjusting the mic placement either closer, or further away from the sound source. Wear headphones to monitor volume levels as well watch the volume meters on the recorder. Ideal recordings will have clearly audible audio, while not being too loud so that it is distorted (going into "the red" on the audio recorder meters). What you hear is what you get. Shock mounts and stands are great to reduce mic handling noise.
*Confirm you are recording. Make sure the record light comes on, that the clock numbers are counting and audio levels are moving up and down.
*Tag the recording. Start each recording by stating the date, time, location, your name, and the name of your interviewee for proper archiving and cataloging of this work.
===Steps for Saving Files===
*Copy files from the audio recorder to a computer as you would from a USB drive. Protect the privacy of your recordings by deleting all files on the recorder before returning equipment to Media Loan.
*Backup the original audio files from the recorder to your program network drive. DO NOT USE SPECIAL CHARACTERS IN FILE NAMES (‘!#$*&%).
*When working with files in an audio editing program like Audacity, create a copy of the originals to be able to revert back if necessary.
===Connecting Recorders to a PC/MAC===
*Before connecting one of the PC compatible devices, make sure power switch is OFF and the display is off.
*Then plug it into an open USB port. Computers will recognize the recorder as a removable disk drive.
*Files are saved onto the recorder in WMA format on Olympus recorders (a program which can read WMA files is required) and in lettered folders corresponding to the folder in which you recorded.
*When connected the recorder display will read “PC” When transferring data, the display will read “BUSY”. DO NOT disconnect the recorder when either message is displayed on the screen.
*BEFORE DETACHING FROM COMPUTER - Remove the detachable device (Eject in Mac OS) and make sure the display is turned off.
===Olympus WS100 RDV===
<gallery>
File:WS-100-Head-On.jpg|
File:WS-100-Back-View.jpg|
File:WS-100-Side-View.jpg|
File:WS-100-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
====Basic Menu Operations====
Press and hold menu for 1 second or longer while recorder is stopped.
Press FF or REW to browse menu options, and PLAY to select an option or to close the menu hit the STOP button at any point.
====Recording====
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder
# Press the REC button to start recording
# Press STOP button to stop recording
====Playback====
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder
# Press the FF or REW to choose the file you want to play
# Press PLAY button to start playback
# Press VOL (+) or VOL (-) button to select proper volume (Between 1-30)
Helpful Tip: To change the playback speed press PLAY to toggle between regular, slow, and fast.
====Erasing Files====
# To erase an individual file press the FOLDER button to choose a folder
# Press the FF or REW button to choose the file you wnt to erase
# Press the ERASE button for less than 3 seconds ‘
# Press the ERASE button again (“DONE” blinks for two seconds and the deletion will be complete)
====Tips====
*When using headphones while recoding or to listen to a recoding, the volume can be adjusted by pressing VOL (- +)
*To Pause press the REC button during recording; PAUSE will appear on the display and the recoding lamp flashes
*If a external microphone is desired, connect to headphone jack. Recommended external mics for this device are omnidirectional sound grabber, lavalier (MOT/MOE)
====Possible Issues====
*If full appears on the screen the device is out of memory. Erase unwanted files to make more room for new recordings.
*If recorder is stopped for 5 minutes, it will go on standby and the display will shut off. Recorder will also stop if left un-paused for 60 seconds. To exit standby mode press any button.

===Olympus DS-30 RDO===
====Basic Menu Operations====
* Press the MENU button for 1 second or longer to open the menu.
* Menu items can be set during a recording or playback.
* Press the + or – button to scroll through the menu. Press the OK button to change the setting of the selected item. Press the OK button to complete the setup screen.
* If the REW button is pressed, the setting will be canceled and it will return to the menu. Press the STOP button to close the menu.
====Power/Hold====
* Push the POWER/HOLD button up to initiate hold and down to turn recorder on. Push POWER/HOLD button down again to turn recorder off.
* When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause recording until hold is turned off.
====Recording/Playback====
# Press FOLDER button to select folder to record into. Use the +/- buttons to navigate to different folders.
# Once folder is selected, press the REC button the the right side to start recording .To pause, press REC button again.
# To play the recording back, select file and presss PLAY button the right side of the recorder. This is also where the STOP button is located.
====Recording Modes====
While the recorder is stopped, open the menu. Select “Rec Mode”. Choose from “ST XQ”, “ST HQ”, “HQ”, “SP” and “LP”.
====Erasing Files====
Select file within folder and press the orange ERASE button on the bottom left.
====Tips====
* Mic sensitivity allows you to choose three different settings. Slide the MIC SENSE switch and select “LECTURE”, “CONF.”, “DICT.”. Lecture is the highest recording quality suitable for conferences with large crowds, or recording at a distance. Conference is suitable for meetings with small amount of people. Diction is the lowest recording sensitivity suitable for dictation.
* Voice filter is a function to cut low and high frequency tones during normal, fast, or slow playback, and enables clear audio playback.
* Noise cancel is a setting to use if audio is difficult to understand because of noisy surroundings. Menu options are high, low, and off and can be set while stopped or during playback.

===Sony RDS===
====Basic Menu Functions====
# Press the MENU/FOLDER button to open folder list.
# Use FF/REW buttons on side to scroll through list.
# Use the PLAY/STOP button on the side to select folder.
* HOLD button is on back of recorder.
** The HOLD button is also the POWER switch. Use it to turn the recorder on and off.
** When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause.
* Recording modes can be altered by using the mEnu and selecting either LOW or HIGH.
====Recording/Playback====
# Select folder to record into.
# When ready to record, press red circular button on the right side of the recorder.
# To pause recording, press the REC red button once again.
# To play back recoding, hit the STOP button on the side of the recorder which will put you back at the folder. Press the PLAY button to play back recording.
====Erasing Files====
# To erase files, select folder and file. Press the small red circular button on the left side to erase.
# Hold button down for 1 second or longer and file will be deleted.
====Tips====
* DPC: When you slide the DPC (Digital PItch Control) switch to “ON”, you can adjust the playback speed between +200% and -75% of normal speed in the menu. The message is played back in natural tones by this function.
** Slide the DPC switch to ON.
** Press and hold MENU button to enter menu. Use REW/FF buttons to select DPC then press PLAY. Press STOP to exit.
** Slide switch to OFF poition to return to normal playback.
* NOISE CUT: When NOISE CUT switch is set to ON, the distortion of very low frequencies which are outside the human voice range is reduced, therefore you can hear the human voice more clearly. However, when you are using the built in speaker this function is not available.
** Slide the NOISE CUT button to the ON/OFF position.

[[category:Media Loan]]

35mm SLR Camera Gear Guide

2013-08-26T20:46:00Z

Kisaar24: /* Focus */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[35mm SLR Camera Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.
===About Media Loan's 35mm SLR Cameras===
Media Loan has three basic manual 35mm SLR camera models: Pentax K1000, Vivitar V3800N, and the Promaster. All models have: built-in through-the-lens light meter; bayonet K mount 50mm lens and hot shoe for flash. Adjustable for ASA/ISO film speeds 20 to 3200. Shutter speeds range from 1 to 1/1000 second and B (for "bulb", timed exposures). No self-timer is built in, but an adaptor is available for check out.
===Precautions===
*Do not expose the camera to dust, dirt, extreme heat/cold, or mechanical shocks.
*Always wear the neck strap.
*Never clean the lens with anything but lens tissue and a tiny amount of lens cleaner (or bring back to Media Loan for cleaning). Never touch or clean the reflex mirror inside the camera.
*Keep the camera in its case and in a camera bag—especially around salt water (salt air mist will corrode the camera in a short period, resulting in expensive repair bills).
*'''Remember: You the borrower assumes full responsibility for loss or damage when you check out equipment.'''
:::'''Please Note:''' The exposure meter is activated every time you remove the lens cap. It is important you keep the lens cap on except when operating the camera. Leaving the lens cap off will gradually drain the battery, resulting in inaccurate exposure measurements. The lens cap also protects the lens from scratches.
===Lens Information===
<gallery>
File:35mm-Front-View.jpg|
File:35mm-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
The SMC Pentax-A Lens has an "A" setting located on the lens aperture ring next to "22" which does not function with the K1000 body. If you accidently get the ring locked in the "A" (auto) position, push the small black button next to the "A" and rotate the ring to the aperture scale.
Media Loan has a few lenses available with the K mount: several 28mm (wide angle); a couple of zoom lenses (28 - 105mm) and macro lenses. If you wish to use other focal length lenses, you must use the K to S adapter (available separately) and you must use only S (screw) mount lenses. 

'''WARNING!''': Installing and removing the adapter is tricky. Have the procedure demonstrated for you when first using the adapter or follow the included instructions. The adapter and the camera lens coupling mechanism are easily damaged. Use care to avoid touching the mirror behind the lens. Permanent damage can result. Please keep the adapter and instructions in the protective pouch when not in use! 

Depth of field preview is not possible with the K1000 when equipped with the standard SMC Pentax-A K mount lens. You will see depth-of-field focus when using accessory lenses in combination with the K to S adapter. The adapter does not couple to the automatic diaphragm feature, therefore optional S Mount lenses read and operate in the manual stop-down mode.

===Basic operaton===
Set the ISO, also called ASA (the film's sensitivity to light) by lifting the outer right ring of the shutter speed dial and rotate it until the ASA/ISO number of your film is opposite the orange dot. Always load film in shade or subdued light.
====Changing the Lens====
<gallery>
File:35mm-Lens-Change-Hand.jpg|Changing the Lens
</gallery>
'''To remove the Lens'''
# Press the '''Lens Release Lever''' toward the camera body.
# Turn the lens '''Counter-Clockwise'''.
'''To mount a Lens'''
# '''Match the red dot''' on the camera body with the red dot on the lens.
# '''Insert the lens''' into the body and '''Turn it Clockwise''' until the lens locks with a click.

====Load the film====
Remove the protective case; open the back of the K1000 by pulling up the rewind crank; place the film cassette in the cassette chamber (left side); push down the rewind knob. Insert the film leader into the slot of the take-up spool (right side of chamber). Advance the film by alternately turning the advance lever and pressing the shutter button until both sprockets engage the film perforations, top and bottom. Close the back by pressing it firmly. Cock the film advance lever (and release the shutter) until the exposure counter reads "1." The film is advancing properly if the rewind crank turns counterclockwise while the film advance lever is being wound.
====Shutter speed====
Set shutter speed by turning the shutter speed dial. Generally, you should use the fastest possible shutter speed to avoid blurred pictures caused by camera movement. When using slow shutter speeds of 1/30th of a second or slower (such as in low light situations or for purposely blurring a moving object) it is advisable to use a tripod (available from Media Loan). If using a flash set the shutter speed at 1/60th of a second. (See the Media Loan Vivitar Guide for flash instructions.)
====Focus====
While looking through the viewfinder, turn the focusing ring until your subject comes into '''Sharp Focus'''.
Another way of setting the focus is to
# Measure or estimate the distance from the camera to the subject.
# Turn the focus ring to the number of feet.

====Taking a Photograph====
# Turn on '''light meter''' by removing the lens cap.
# While looking through the viewfinder, turn the '''focusing ring''' (on the lens) until subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
# Set the '''exposure''' by rotating the aperture ring (f stop) ring of the lens until the needle on the right side of the viewfinder image is at the center position.
# Hold the camera firmly and release the '''shutter''' and then '''advance the film''' advance lever for the next picture.
====Rewind the film====
You've exposed the last frame of film when the counter is on 20, 24 or 36 and the advance lever will not move.
# Press the black film '''Rewind Button''' on the bottom of the camera.
# '''Crank Your Film''' back into its cassette by flipping the rewind crank out and turning it slowly in the '''Direction of the Arrow''' (clockwise).
# When you feel the tension release, '''Turn the Crank Several Additional Turns'''.
# '''Pull Up on the Rewind Crank''' until the back pops open.
# Remove the film cassette.
# Push the rewind crank back down.
# Close the back of the camera.
# Make sure the lens cap is back on.

===Questions?===
Ask or call a Media Loan staff person.

* '''Location:''' Library 2504
* '''Phone:''' (360) 867-6253

[[category:Media Loan]]

35mm SLR Camera Gear Guide

2013-08-26T20:45:28Z

Kisaar24: /* Changing lens */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[35mm SLR Camera Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.
===About Media Loan's 35mm SLR Cameras===
Media Loan has three basic manual 35mm SLR camera models: Pentax K1000, Vivitar V3800N, and the Promaster. All models have: built-in through-the-lens light meter; bayonet K mount 50mm lens and hot shoe for flash. Adjustable for ASA/ISO film speeds 20 to 3200. Shutter speeds range from 1 to 1/1000 second and B (for "bulb", timed exposures). No self-timer is built in, but an adaptor is available for check out.
===Precautions===
*Do not expose the camera to dust, dirt, extreme heat/cold, or mechanical shocks.
*Always wear the neck strap.
*Never clean the lens with anything but lens tissue and a tiny amount of lens cleaner (or bring back to Media Loan for cleaning). Never touch or clean the reflex mirror inside the camera.
*Keep the camera in its case and in a camera bag—especially around salt water (salt air mist will corrode the camera in a short period, resulting in expensive repair bills).
*'''Remember: You the borrower assumes full responsibility for loss or damage when you check out equipment.'''
:::'''Please Note:''' The exposure meter is activated every time you remove the lens cap. It is important you keep the lens cap on except when operating the camera. Leaving the lens cap off will gradually drain the battery, resulting in inaccurate exposure measurements. The lens cap also protects the lens from scratches.
===Lens Information===
<gallery>
File:35mm-Front-View.jpg|
File:35mm-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
The SMC Pentax-A Lens has an "A" setting located on the lens aperture ring next to "22" which does not function with the K1000 body. If you accidently get the ring locked in the "A" (auto) position, push the small black button next to the "A" and rotate the ring to the aperture scale.
Media Loan has a few lenses available with the K mount: several 28mm (wide angle); a couple of zoom lenses (28 - 105mm) and macro lenses. If you wish to use other focal length lenses, you must use the K to S adapter (available separately) and you must use only S (screw) mount lenses. 

'''WARNING!''': Installing and removing the adapter is tricky. Have the procedure demonstrated for you when first using the adapter or follow the included instructions. The adapter and the camera lens coupling mechanism are easily damaged. Use care to avoid touching the mirror behind the lens. Permanent damage can result. Please keep the adapter and instructions in the protective pouch when not in use! 

Depth of field preview is not possible with the K1000 when equipped with the standard SMC Pentax-A K mount lens. You will see depth-of-field focus when using accessory lenses in combination with the K to S adapter. The adapter does not couple to the automatic diaphragm feature, therefore optional S Mount lenses read and operate in the manual stop-down mode.

===Basic operaton===
Set the ISO, also called ASA (the film's sensitivity to light) by lifting the outer right ring of the shutter speed dial and rotate it until the ASA/ISO number of your film is opposite the orange dot. Always load film in shade or subdued light.
====Changing the Lens====
<gallery>
File:35mm-Lens-Change-Hand.jpg|Changing the Lens
</gallery>
'''To remove the Lens'''
# Press the '''Lens Release Lever''' toward the camera body.
# Turn the lens '''Counter-Clockwise'''.
'''To mount a Lens'''
# '''Match the red dot''' on the camera body with the red dot on the lens.
# '''Insert the lens''' into the body and '''Turn it Clockwise''' until the lens locks with a click.

====Load the film====
Remove the protective case; open the back of the K1000 by pulling up the rewind crank; place the film cassette in the cassette chamber (left side); push down the rewind knob. Insert the film leader into the slot of the take-up spool (right side of chamber). Advance the film by alternately turning the advance lever and pressing the shutter button until both sprockets engage the film perforations, top and bottom. Close the back by pressing it firmly. Cock the film advance lever (and release the shutter) until the exposure counter reads "1." The film is advancing properly if the rewind crank turns counterclockwise while the film advance lever is being wound.
====Shutter speed====
Set shutter speed by turning the shutter speed dial. Generally, you should use the fastest possible shutter speed to avoid blurred pictures caused by camera movement. When using slow shutter speeds of 1/30th of a second or slower (such as in low light situations or for purposely blurring a moving object) it is advisable to use a tripod (available from Media Loan). If using a flash set the shutter speed at 1/60th of a second. (See the Media Loan Vivitar Guide for flash instructions.)
====Focus====
While looking through the viewfinder, turn the focusing ring until your subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
Another way of setting the focus is to
# Measure or estimate the distance from the camera to the subject and
# Turn the focus ring to the number of feet.

====Taking a Photograph====
# Turn on '''light meter''' by removing the lens cap.
# While looking through the viewfinder, turn the '''focusing ring''' (on the lens) until subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
# Set the '''exposure''' by rotating the aperture ring (f stop) ring of the lens until the needle on the right side of the viewfinder image is at the center position.
# Hold the camera firmly and release the '''shutter''' and then '''advance the film''' advance lever for the next picture.
====Rewind the film====
You've exposed the last frame of film when the counter is on 20, 24 or 36 and the advance lever will not move.
# Press the black film '''Rewind Button''' on the bottom of the camera.
# '''Crank Your Film''' back into its cassette by flipping the rewind crank out and turning it slowly in the '''Direction of the Arrow''' (clockwise).
# When you feel the tension release, '''Turn the Crank Several Additional Turns'''.
# '''Pull Up on the Rewind Crank''' until the back pops open.
# Remove the film cassette.
# Push the rewind crank back down.
# Close the back of the camera.
# Make sure the lens cap is back on.

===Questions?===
Ask or call a Media Loan staff person.

* '''Location:''' Library 2504
* '''Phone:''' (360) 867-6253

[[category:Media Loan]]

35mm SLR Camera Gear Guide

2013-08-26T20:44:16Z

Kisaar24: /* Changing lens */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[35mm SLR Camera Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.
===About Media Loan's 35mm SLR Cameras===
Media Loan has three basic manual 35mm SLR camera models: Pentax K1000, Vivitar V3800N, and the Promaster. All models have: built-in through-the-lens light meter; bayonet K mount 50mm lens and hot shoe for flash. Adjustable for ASA/ISO film speeds 20 to 3200. Shutter speeds range from 1 to 1/1000 second and B (for "bulb", timed exposures). No self-timer is built in, but an adaptor is available for check out.
===Precautions===
*Do not expose the camera to dust, dirt, extreme heat/cold, or mechanical shocks.
*Always wear the neck strap.
*Never clean the lens with anything but lens tissue and a tiny amount of lens cleaner (or bring back to Media Loan for cleaning). Never touch or clean the reflex mirror inside the camera.
*Keep the camera in its case and in a camera bag—especially around salt water (salt air mist will corrode the camera in a short period, resulting in expensive repair bills).
*'''Remember: You the borrower assumes full responsibility for loss or damage when you check out equipment.'''
:::'''Please Note:''' The exposure meter is activated every time you remove the lens cap. It is important you keep the lens cap on except when operating the camera. Leaving the lens cap off will gradually drain the battery, resulting in inaccurate exposure measurements. The lens cap also protects the lens from scratches.
===Lens Information===
<gallery>
File:35mm-Front-View.jpg|
File:35mm-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
The SMC Pentax-A Lens has an "A" setting located on the lens aperture ring next to "22" which does not function with the K1000 body. If you accidently get the ring locked in the "A" (auto) position, push the small black button next to the "A" and rotate the ring to the aperture scale.
Media Loan has a few lenses available with the K mount: several 28mm (wide angle); a couple of zoom lenses (28 - 105mm) and macro lenses. If you wish to use other focal length lenses, you must use the K to S adapter (available separately) and you must use only S (screw) mount lenses. 

'''WARNING!''': Installing and removing the adapter is tricky. Have the procedure demonstrated for you when first using the adapter or follow the included instructions. The adapter and the camera lens coupling mechanism are easily damaged. Use care to avoid touching the mirror behind the lens. Permanent damage can result. Please keep the adapter and instructions in the protective pouch when not in use! 

Depth of field preview is not possible with the K1000 when equipped with the standard SMC Pentax-A K mount lens. You will see depth-of-field focus when using accessory lenses in combination with the K to S adapter. The adapter does not couple to the automatic diaphragm feature, therefore optional S Mount lenses read and operate in the manual stop-down mode.

===Basic operaton===
Set the ISO, also called ASA (the film's sensitivity to light) by lifting the outer right ring of the shutter speed dial and rotate it until the ASA/ISO number of your film is opposite the orange dot. Always load film in shade or subdued light.
====Changing lens====
<gallery>
File:35mm-Lens-Change-Hand.jpg|Changing the Lens
</gallery>
To remove the lens,
# Press the '''Lens Release Lever''' toward the camera body.
# Turn the lens '''Counter-Clockwise'''.
To mount a lense,
# '''Match the red dot''' on the camera body with the red dot on the lens.
# '''Insert the lens''' into the body and '''Turn it Clockwise''' until the lens locks with a click.

====Load the film====
Remove the protective case; open the back of the K1000 by pulling up the rewind crank; place the film cassette in the cassette chamber (left side); push down the rewind knob. Insert the film leader into the slot of the take-up spool (right side of chamber). Advance the film by alternately turning the advance lever and pressing the shutter button until both sprockets engage the film perforations, top and bottom. Close the back by pressing it firmly. Cock the film advance lever (and release the shutter) until the exposure counter reads "1." The film is advancing properly if the rewind crank turns counterclockwise while the film advance lever is being wound.
====Shutter speed====
Set shutter speed by turning the shutter speed dial. Generally, you should use the fastest possible shutter speed to avoid blurred pictures caused by camera movement. When using slow shutter speeds of 1/30th of a second or slower (such as in low light situations or for purposely blurring a moving object) it is advisable to use a tripod (available from Media Loan). If using a flash set the shutter speed at 1/60th of a second. (See the Media Loan Vivitar Guide for flash instructions.)
====Focus====
While looking through the viewfinder, turn the focusing ring until your subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
Another way of setting the focus is to
# Measure or estimate the distance from the camera to the subject and
# Turn the focus ring to the number of feet.

====Taking a Photograph====
# Turn on '''light meter''' by removing the lens cap.
# While looking through the viewfinder, turn the '''focusing ring''' (on the lens) until subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
# Set the '''exposure''' by rotating the aperture ring (f stop) ring of the lens until the needle on the right side of the viewfinder image is at the center position.
# Hold the camera firmly and release the '''shutter''' and then '''advance the film''' advance lever for the next picture.
====Rewind the film====
You've exposed the last frame of film when the counter is on 20, 24 or 36 and the advance lever will not move.
# Press the black film '''Rewind Button''' on the bottom of the camera.
# '''Crank Your Film''' back into its cassette by flipping the rewind crank out and turning it slowly in the '''Direction of the Arrow''' (clockwise).
# When you feel the tension release, '''Turn the Crank Several Additional Turns'''.
# '''Pull Up on the Rewind Crank''' until the back pops open.
# Remove the film cassette.
# Push the rewind crank back down.
# Close the back of the camera.
# Make sure the lens cap is back on.

===Questions?===
Ask or call a Media Loan staff person.

* '''Location:''' Library 2504
* '''Phone:''' (360) 867-6253

[[category:Media Loan]]

35mm SLR Camera Gear Guide

2013-08-26T20:44:01Z

Kisaar24: /* Rewind the film */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[35mm SLR Camera Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.
===About Media Loan's 35mm SLR Cameras===
Media Loan has three basic manual 35mm SLR camera models: Pentax K1000, Vivitar V3800N, and the Promaster. All models have: built-in through-the-lens light meter; bayonet K mount 50mm lens and hot shoe for flash. Adjustable for ASA/ISO film speeds 20 to 3200. Shutter speeds range from 1 to 1/1000 second and B (for "bulb", timed exposures). No self-timer is built in, but an adaptor is available for check out.
===Precautions===
*Do not expose the camera to dust, dirt, extreme heat/cold, or mechanical shocks.
*Always wear the neck strap.
*Never clean the lens with anything but lens tissue and a tiny amount of lens cleaner (or bring back to Media Loan for cleaning). Never touch or clean the reflex mirror inside the camera.
*Keep the camera in its case and in a camera bag—especially around salt water (salt air mist will corrode the camera in a short period, resulting in expensive repair bills).
*'''Remember: You the borrower assumes full responsibility for loss or damage when you check out equipment.'''
:::'''Please Note:''' The exposure meter is activated every time you remove the lens cap. It is important you keep the lens cap on except when operating the camera. Leaving the lens cap off will gradually drain the battery, resulting in inaccurate exposure measurements. The lens cap also protects the lens from scratches.
===Lens Information===
<gallery>
File:35mm-Front-View.jpg|
File:35mm-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
The SMC Pentax-A Lens has an "A" setting located on the lens aperture ring next to "22" which does not function with the K1000 body. If you accidently get the ring locked in the "A" (auto) position, push the small black button next to the "A" and rotate the ring to the aperture scale.
Media Loan has a few lenses available with the K mount: several 28mm (wide angle); a couple of zoom lenses (28 - 105mm) and macro lenses. If you wish to use other focal length lenses, you must use the K to S adapter (available separately) and you must use only S (screw) mount lenses. 

'''WARNING!''': Installing and removing the adapter is tricky. Have the procedure demonstrated for you when first using the adapter or follow the included instructions. The adapter and the camera lens coupling mechanism are easily damaged. Use care to avoid touching the mirror behind the lens. Permanent damage can result. Please keep the adapter and instructions in the protective pouch when not in use! 

Depth of field preview is not possible with the K1000 when equipped with the standard SMC Pentax-A K mount lens. You will see depth-of-field focus when using accessory lenses in combination with the K to S adapter. The adapter does not couple to the automatic diaphragm feature, therefore optional S Mount lenses read and operate in the manual stop-down mode.

===Basic operaton===
Set the ISO, also called ASA (the film's sensitivity to light) by lifting the outer right ring of the shutter speed dial and rotate it until the ASA/ISO number of your film is opposite the orange dot. Always load film in shade or subdued light.
====Changing lens====
<gallery>
File:35mm-Lens-Change-Hand.jpg|Changing the Lens
</gallery>
To remove the lens,
# Press the '''Lens Release Lever''' toward the camera body
# Turn the lens '''Counter-Clockwise'''.
To mount a lense,
# '''Match the red dot''' on the camera body with the red dot on the lens.
# '''Insert the lens''' into the body and '''Turn it Clockwise''' until the lens locks with a click.

====Load the film====
Remove the protective case; open the back of the K1000 by pulling up the rewind crank; place the film cassette in the cassette chamber (left side); push down the rewind knob. Insert the film leader into the slot of the take-up spool (right side of chamber). Advance the film by alternately turning the advance lever and pressing the shutter button until both sprockets engage the film perforations, top and bottom. Close the back by pressing it firmly. Cock the film advance lever (and release the shutter) until the exposure counter reads "1." The film is advancing properly if the rewind crank turns counterclockwise while the film advance lever is being wound.
====Shutter speed====
Set shutter speed by turning the shutter speed dial. Generally, you should use the fastest possible shutter speed to avoid blurred pictures caused by camera movement. When using slow shutter speeds of 1/30th of a second or slower (such as in low light situations or for purposely blurring a moving object) it is advisable to use a tripod (available from Media Loan). If using a flash set the shutter speed at 1/60th of a second. (See the Media Loan Vivitar Guide for flash instructions.)
====Focus====
While looking through the viewfinder, turn the focusing ring until your subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
Another way of setting the focus is to
# Measure or estimate the distance from the camera to the subject and
# Turn the focus ring to the number of feet.

====Taking a Photograph====
# Turn on '''light meter''' by removing the lens cap.
# While looking through the viewfinder, turn the '''focusing ring''' (on the lens) until subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
# Set the '''exposure''' by rotating the aperture ring (f stop) ring of the lens until the needle on the right side of the viewfinder image is at the center position.
# Hold the camera firmly and release the '''shutter''' and then '''advance the film''' advance lever for the next picture.
====Rewind the film====
You've exposed the last frame of film when the counter is on 20, 24 or 36 and the advance lever will not move.
# Press the black film '''Rewind Button''' on the bottom of the camera.
# '''Crank Your Film''' back into its cassette by flipping the rewind crank out and turning it slowly in the '''Direction of the Arrow''' (clockwise).
# When you feel the tension release, '''Turn the Crank Several Additional Turns'''.
# '''Pull Up on the Rewind Crank''' until the back pops open.
# Remove the film cassette.
# Push the rewind crank back down.
# Close the back of the camera.
# Make sure the lens cap is back on.

===Questions?===
Ask or call a Media Loan staff person.

* '''Location:''' Library 2504
* '''Phone:''' (360) 867-6253

[[category:Media Loan]]

35mm SLR Camera Gear Guide

2013-08-26T20:41:53Z

Kisaar24: /* Focus */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[35mm SLR Camera Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.
===About Media Loan's 35mm SLR Cameras===
Media Loan has three basic manual 35mm SLR camera models: Pentax K1000, Vivitar V3800N, and the Promaster. All models have: built-in through-the-lens light meter; bayonet K mount 50mm lens and hot shoe for flash. Adjustable for ASA/ISO film speeds 20 to 3200. Shutter speeds range from 1 to 1/1000 second and B (for "bulb", timed exposures). No self-timer is built in, but an adaptor is available for check out.
===Precautions===
*Do not expose the camera to dust, dirt, extreme heat/cold, or mechanical shocks.
*Always wear the neck strap.
*Never clean the lens with anything but lens tissue and a tiny amount of lens cleaner (or bring back to Media Loan for cleaning). Never touch or clean the reflex mirror inside the camera.
*Keep the camera in its case and in a camera bag—especially around salt water (salt air mist will corrode the camera in a short period, resulting in expensive repair bills).
*'''Remember: You the borrower assumes full responsibility for loss or damage when you check out equipment.'''
:::'''Please Note:''' The exposure meter is activated every time you remove the lens cap. It is important you keep the lens cap on except when operating the camera. Leaving the lens cap off will gradually drain the battery, resulting in inaccurate exposure measurements. The lens cap also protects the lens from scratches.
===Lens Information===
<gallery>
File:35mm-Front-View.jpg|
File:35mm-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
The SMC Pentax-A Lens has an "A" setting located on the lens aperture ring next to "22" which does not function with the K1000 body. If you accidently get the ring locked in the "A" (auto) position, push the small black button next to the "A" and rotate the ring to the aperture scale.
Media Loan has a few lenses available with the K mount: several 28mm (wide angle); a couple of zoom lenses (28 - 105mm) and macro lenses. If you wish to use other focal length lenses, you must use the K to S adapter (available separately) and you must use only S (screw) mount lenses. 

'''WARNING!''': Installing and removing the adapter is tricky. Have the procedure demonstrated for you when first using the adapter or follow the included instructions. The adapter and the camera lens coupling mechanism are easily damaged. Use care to avoid touching the mirror behind the lens. Permanent damage can result. Please keep the adapter and instructions in the protective pouch when not in use! 

Depth of field preview is not possible with the K1000 when equipped with the standard SMC Pentax-A K mount lens. You will see depth-of-field focus when using accessory lenses in combination with the K to S adapter. The adapter does not couple to the automatic diaphragm feature, therefore optional S Mount lenses read and operate in the manual stop-down mode.

===Basic operaton===
Set the ISO, also called ASA (the film's sensitivity to light) by lifting the outer right ring of the shutter speed dial and rotate it until the ASA/ISO number of your film is opposite the orange dot. Always load film in shade or subdued light.
====Changing lens====
<gallery>
File:35mm-Lens-Change-Hand.jpg|Changing the Lens
</gallery>
To remove the lens,
# Press the '''Lens Release Lever''' toward the camera body
# Turn the lens '''Counter-Clockwise'''.
To mount a lense,
# '''Match the red dot''' on the camera body with the red dot on the lens.
# '''Insert the lens''' into the body and '''Turn it Clockwise''' until the lens locks with a click.

====Load the film====
Remove the protective case; open the back of the K1000 by pulling up the rewind crank; place the film cassette in the cassette chamber (left side); push down the rewind knob. Insert the film leader into the slot of the take-up spool (right side of chamber). Advance the film by alternately turning the advance lever and pressing the shutter button until both sprockets engage the film perforations, top and bottom. Close the back by pressing it firmly. Cock the film advance lever (and release the shutter) until the exposure counter reads "1." The film is advancing properly if the rewind crank turns counterclockwise while the film advance lever is being wound.
====Shutter speed====
Set shutter speed by turning the shutter speed dial. Generally, you should use the fastest possible shutter speed to avoid blurred pictures caused by camera movement. When using slow shutter speeds of 1/30th of a second or slower (such as in low light situations or for purposely blurring a moving object) it is advisable to use a tripod (available from Media Loan). If using a flash set the shutter speed at 1/60th of a second. (See the Media Loan Vivitar Guide for flash instructions.)
====Focus====
While looking through the viewfinder, turn the focusing ring until your subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
Another way of setting the focus is to
# Measure or estimate the distance from the camera to the subject and
# Turn the focus ring to the number of feet.

====Taking a Photograph====
# Turn on '''light meter''' by removing the lens cap.
# While looking through the viewfinder, turn the '''focusing ring''' (on the lens) until subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
# Set the '''exposure''' by rotating the aperture ring (f stop) ring of the lens until the needle on the right side of the viewfinder image is at the center position.
# Hold the camera firmly and release the '''shutter''' and then '''advance the film''' advance lever for the next picture.
====Rewind the film====
You've exposed the last frame of film when the counter is on 20, 24 or 36 and the advance lever will not move.
# Press the black film '''rewind button''' on the bottom of the camera and
# '''crank your film''' back into its cassette by flipping the rewind crank out and turning it slowly in the '''direction of the arrow''' (clockwise).
# When you feel the tension release, '''turn the crank several additional turns''' and then
# '''pull up on the rewind crank''' until the back pops open.
# Remove the film cassette;
# push the rewind crank back down;
# close the back of the camera and
# make sure the lens cap is back on.
===Questions?===
Ask or call a Media Loan staff person.

* '''Location:''' Library 2504
* '''Phone:''' (360) 867-6253

[[category:Media Loan]]

35mm SLR Camera Gear Guide

2013-08-26T20:41:20Z

Kisaar24: /* Changing lens */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[35mm SLR Camera Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.
===About Media Loan's 35mm SLR Cameras===
Media Loan has three basic manual 35mm SLR camera models: Pentax K1000, Vivitar V3800N, and the Promaster. All models have: built-in through-the-lens light meter; bayonet K mount 50mm lens and hot shoe for flash. Adjustable for ASA/ISO film speeds 20 to 3200. Shutter speeds range from 1 to 1/1000 second and B (for "bulb", timed exposures). No self-timer is built in, but an adaptor is available for check out.
===Precautions===
*Do not expose the camera to dust, dirt, extreme heat/cold, or mechanical shocks.
*Always wear the neck strap.
*Never clean the lens with anything but lens tissue and a tiny amount of lens cleaner (or bring back to Media Loan for cleaning). Never touch or clean the reflex mirror inside the camera.
*Keep the camera in its case and in a camera bag—especially around salt water (salt air mist will corrode the camera in a short period, resulting in expensive repair bills).
*'''Remember: You the borrower assumes full responsibility for loss or damage when you check out equipment.'''
:::'''Please Note:''' The exposure meter is activated every time you remove the lens cap. It is important you keep the lens cap on except when operating the camera. Leaving the lens cap off will gradually drain the battery, resulting in inaccurate exposure measurements. The lens cap also protects the lens from scratches.
===Lens Information===
<gallery>
File:35mm-Front-View.jpg|
File:35mm-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
The SMC Pentax-A Lens has an "A" setting located on the lens aperture ring next to "22" which does not function with the K1000 body. If you accidently get the ring locked in the "A" (auto) position, push the small black button next to the "A" and rotate the ring to the aperture scale.
Media Loan has a few lenses available with the K mount: several 28mm (wide angle); a couple of zoom lenses (28 - 105mm) and macro lenses. If you wish to use other focal length lenses, you must use the K to S adapter (available separately) and you must use only S (screw) mount lenses. 

'''WARNING!''': Installing and removing the adapter is tricky. Have the procedure demonstrated for you when first using the adapter or follow the included instructions. The adapter and the camera lens coupling mechanism are easily damaged. Use care to avoid touching the mirror behind the lens. Permanent damage can result. Please keep the adapter and instructions in the protective pouch when not in use! 

Depth of field preview is not possible with the K1000 when equipped with the standard SMC Pentax-A K mount lens. You will see depth-of-field focus when using accessory lenses in combination with the K to S adapter. The adapter does not couple to the automatic diaphragm feature, therefore optional S Mount lenses read and operate in the manual stop-down mode.

===Basic operaton===
Set the ISO, also called ASA (the film's sensitivity to light) by lifting the outer right ring of the shutter speed dial and rotate it until the ASA/ISO number of your film is opposite the orange dot. Always load film in shade or subdued light.
====Changing lens====
<gallery>
File:35mm-Lens-Change-Hand.jpg|Changing the Lens
</gallery>
To remove the lens,
# Press the '''Lens Release Lever''' toward the camera body
# Turn the lens '''Counter-Clockwise'''.
To mount a lense,
# '''Match the red dot''' on the camera body with the red dot on the lens.
# '''Insert the lens''' into the body and '''Turn it Clockwise''' until the lens locks with a click.

====Load the film====
Remove the protective case; open the back of the K1000 by pulling up the rewind crank; place the film cassette in the cassette chamber (left side); push down the rewind knob. Insert the film leader into the slot of the take-up spool (right side of chamber). Advance the film by alternately turning the advance lever and pressing the shutter button until both sprockets engage the film perforations, top and bottom. Close the back by pressing it firmly. Cock the film advance lever (and release the shutter) until the exposure counter reads "1." The film is advancing properly if the rewind crank turns counterclockwise while the film advance lever is being wound.
====Shutter speed====
Set shutter speed by turning the shutter speed dial. Generally, you should use the fastest possible shutter speed to avoid blurred pictures caused by camera movement. When using slow shutter speeds of 1/30th of a second or slower (such as in low light situations or for purposely blurring a moving object) it is advisable to use a tripod (available from Media Loan). If using a flash set the shutter speed at 1/60th of a second. (See the Media Loan Vivitar Guide for flash instructions.)
====Focus====
While looking through the viewfinder, turn the focusing ring until your subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
Another way of setting the focus is to
# measure or estimate the distance from the camera to the subject and
# turn the focus ring to the number of feet.
====Taking a Photograph====
# Turn on '''light meter''' by removing the lens cap.
# While looking through the viewfinder, turn the '''focusing ring''' (on the lens) until subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
# Set the '''exposure''' by rotating the aperture ring (f stop) ring of the lens until the needle on the right side of the viewfinder image is at the center position.
# Hold the camera firmly and release the '''shutter''' and then '''advance the film''' advance lever for the next picture.
====Rewind the film====
You've exposed the last frame of film when the counter is on 20, 24 or 36 and the advance lever will not move.
# Press the black film '''rewind button''' on the bottom of the camera and
# '''crank your film''' back into its cassette by flipping the rewind crank out and turning it slowly in the '''direction of the arrow''' (clockwise).
# When you feel the tension release, '''turn the crank several additional turns''' and then
# '''pull up on the rewind crank''' until the back pops open.
# Remove the film cassette;
# push the rewind crank back down;
# close the back of the camera and
# make sure the lens cap is back on.
===Questions?===
Ask or call a Media Loan staff person.

* '''Location:''' Library 2504
* '''Phone:''' (360) 867-6253

[[category:Media Loan]]

35mm SLR Camera Gear Guide

2013-08-26T20:40:07Z

Kisaar24: /* Lens Information */

'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[35mm SLR Camera Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.
===About Media Loan's 35mm SLR Cameras===
Media Loan has three basic manual 35mm SLR camera models: Pentax K1000, Vivitar V3800N, and the Promaster. All models have: built-in through-the-lens light meter; bayonet K mount 50mm lens and hot shoe for flash. Adjustable for ASA/ISO film speeds 20 to 3200. Shutter speeds range from 1 to 1/1000 second and B (for "bulb", timed exposures). No self-timer is built in, but an adaptor is available for check out.
===Precautions===
*Do not expose the camera to dust, dirt, extreme heat/cold, or mechanical shocks.
*Always wear the neck strap.
*Never clean the lens with anything but lens tissue and a tiny amount of lens cleaner (or bring back to Media Loan for cleaning). Never touch or clean the reflex mirror inside the camera.
*Keep the camera in its case and in a camera bag—especially around salt water (salt air mist will corrode the camera in a short period, resulting in expensive repair bills).
*'''Remember: You the borrower assumes full responsibility for loss or damage when you check out equipment.'''
:::'''Please Note:''' The exposure meter is activated every time you remove the lens cap. It is important you keep the lens cap on except when operating the camera. Leaving the lens cap off will gradually drain the battery, resulting in inaccurate exposure measurements. The lens cap also protects the lens from scratches.
===Lens Information===
<gallery>
File:35mm-Front-View.jpg|
File:35mm-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
The SMC Pentax-A Lens has an "A" setting located on the lens aperture ring next to "22" which does not function with the K1000 body. If you accidently get the ring locked in the "A" (auto) position, push the small black button next to the "A" and rotate the ring to the aperture scale.
Media Loan has a few lenses available with the K mount: several 28mm (wide angle); a couple of zoom lenses (28 - 105mm) and macro lenses. If you wish to use other focal length lenses, you must use the K to S adapter (available separately) and you must use only S (screw) mount lenses. 

'''WARNING!''': Installing and removing the adapter is tricky. Have the procedure demonstrated for you when first using the adapter or follow the included instructions. The adapter and the camera lens coupling mechanism are easily damaged. Use care to avoid touching the mirror behind the lens. Permanent damage can result. Please keep the adapter and instructions in the protective pouch when not in use! 

Depth of field preview is not possible with the K1000 when equipped with the standard SMC Pentax-A K mount lens. You will see depth-of-field focus when using accessory lenses in combination with the K to S adapter. The adapter does not couple to the automatic diaphragm feature, therefore optional S Mount lenses read and operate in the manual stop-down mode.

===Basic operaton===
Set the ISO, also called ASA (the film's sensitivity to light) by lifting the outer right ring of the shutter speed dial and rotate it until the ASA/ISO number of your film is opposite the orange dot. Always load film in shade or subdued light.
====Changing lens====
<gallery>
File:35mm-Change-Hand.jpg|Changing the Lens
</gallery>
To remove the lens,
# press the '''lens release lever''' toward the camera body
# turn the lens '''counter-clockwise'''.
To mount a lense,
# '''Match the red dot''' on the camera body with the red dot on the lens.
# '''Insert the lens''' into the body and '''turn it clockwise''' until the lens locks with a click.
====Load the film====
Remove the protective case; open the back of the K1000 by pulling up the rewind crank; place the film cassette in the cassette chamber (left side); push down the rewind knob. Insert the film leader into the slot of the take-up spool (right side of chamber). Advance the film by alternately turning the advance lever and pressing the shutter button until both sprockets engage the film perforations, top and bottom. Close the back by pressing it firmly. Cock the film advance lever (and release the shutter) until the exposure counter reads "1." The film is advancing properly if the rewind crank turns counterclockwise while the film advance lever is being wound.
====Shutter speed====
Set shutter speed by turning the shutter speed dial. Generally, you should use the fastest possible shutter speed to avoid blurred pictures caused by camera movement. When using slow shutter speeds of 1/30th of a second or slower (such as in low light situations or for purposely blurring a moving object) it is advisable to use a tripod (available from Media Loan). If using a flash set the shutter speed at 1/60th of a second. (See the Media Loan Vivitar Guide for flash instructions.)
====Focus====
While looking through the viewfinder, turn the focusing ring until your subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
Another way of setting the focus is to
# measure or estimate the distance from the camera to the subject and
# turn the focus ring to the number of feet.
====Taking a Photograph====
# Turn on '''light meter''' by removing the lens cap.
# While looking through the viewfinder, turn the '''focusing ring''' (on the lens) until subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
# Set the '''exposure''' by rotating the aperture ring (f stop) ring of the lens until the needle on the right side of the viewfinder image is at the center position.
# Hold the camera firmly and release the '''shutter''' and then '''advance the film''' advance lever for the next picture.
====Rewind the film====
You've exposed the last frame of film when the counter is on 20, 24 or 36 and the advance lever will not move.
# Press the black film '''rewind button''' on the bottom of the camera and
# '''crank your film''' back into its cassette by flipping the rewind crank out and turning it slowly in the '''direction of the arrow''' (clockwise).
# When you feel the tension release, '''turn the crank several additional turns''' and then
# '''pull up on the rewind crank''' until the back pops open.
# Remove the film cassette;
# push the rewind crank back down;
# close the back of the camera and
# make sure the lens cap is back on.
===Questions?===
Ask or call a Media Loan staff person.

* '''Location:''' Library 2504
* '''Phone:''' (360) 867-6253

[[category:Media Loan]]

35mm SLR Camera Gear Guide

2013-08-26T20:39:11Z

Kisaar24:

'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[35mm SLR Camera Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.
===About Media Loan's 35mm SLR Cameras===
Media Loan has three basic manual 35mm SLR camera models: Pentax K1000, Vivitar V3800N, and the Promaster. All models have: built-in through-the-lens light meter; bayonet K mount 50mm lens and hot shoe for flash. Adjustable for ASA/ISO film speeds 20 to 3200. Shutter speeds range from 1 to 1/1000 second and B (for "bulb", timed exposures). No self-timer is built in, but an adaptor is available for check out.
===Precautions===
*Do not expose the camera to dust, dirt, extreme heat/cold, or mechanical shocks.
*Always wear the neck strap.
*Never clean the lens with anything but lens tissue and a tiny amount of lens cleaner (or bring back to Media Loan for cleaning). Never touch or clean the reflex mirror inside the camera.
*Keep the camera in its case and in a camera bag—especially around salt water (salt air mist will corrode the camera in a short period, resulting in expensive repair bills).
*'''Remember: You the borrower assumes full responsibility for loss or damage when you check out equipment.'''
:::'''Please Note:''' The exposure meter is activated every time you remove the lens cap. It is important you keep the lens cap on except when operating the camera. Leaving the lens cap off will gradually drain the battery, resulting in inaccurate exposure measurements. The lens cap also protects the lens from scratches.
===Lens Information===
<gallery>
File:35mm-Front-View.jpg|
File:35mm-Top-View.jpg|
</gallery>
The SMC Pentax-A Lens has an "A" setting located on the lens aperture ring next to "22" which does not function with the K1000 body. If you accidently get the ring locked in the "A" (auto) position, push the small black button next to the "A" and rotate the ring to the aperture scale.
Media Loan has a few lenses available with the K mount: several 28mm (wide angle); a couple of zoom lenses (28 - 105mm) and macro lenses. If you wish to use other focal length lenses, you must use the K to S adapter (available separately) and you must use only S (screw) mount lenses. '''WARNING!''': Installing and removing the adapter is tricky. Have the procedure demonstrated for you when first using the adapter or follow the included instructions. The adapter and the camera lens coupling mechanism are easily damaged. Use care to avoid touching the mirror behind the lens. Permanent damage can result. Please keep the adapter and instructions in the protective pouch when not in use!
Depth of field preview is not possible with the K1000 when equipped with the standard SMC Pentax-A K mount lens. You will see depth-of-field focus when using accessory lenses in combination with the K to S adapter. The adapter does not couple to the automatic diaphragm feature, therefore optional S Mount lenses read and operate in the manual stop-down mode.
===Basic operaton===
Set the ISO, also called ASA (the film's sensitivity to light) by lifting the outer right ring of the shutter speed dial and rotate it until the ASA/ISO number of your film is opposite the orange dot. Always load film in shade or subdued light.
====Changing lens====
<gallery>
File:35mm-Change-Hand.jpg|Changing the Lens
</gallery>
To remove the lens,
# press the '''lens release lever''' toward the camera body
# turn the lens '''counter-clockwise'''.
To mount a lense,
# '''Match the red dot''' on the camera body with the red dot on the lens.
# '''Insert the lens''' into the body and '''turn it clockwise''' until the lens locks with a click.
====Load the film====
Remove the protective case; open the back of the K1000 by pulling up the rewind crank; place the film cassette in the cassette chamber (left side); push down the rewind knob. Insert the film leader into the slot of the take-up spool (right side of chamber). Advance the film by alternately turning the advance lever and pressing the shutter button until both sprockets engage the film perforations, top and bottom. Close the back by pressing it firmly. Cock the film advance lever (and release the shutter) until the exposure counter reads "1." The film is advancing properly if the rewind crank turns counterclockwise while the film advance lever is being wound.
====Shutter speed====
Set shutter speed by turning the shutter speed dial. Generally, you should use the fastest possible shutter speed to avoid blurred pictures caused by camera movement. When using slow shutter speeds of 1/30th of a second or slower (such as in low light situations or for purposely blurring a moving object) it is advisable to use a tripod (available from Media Loan). If using a flash set the shutter speed at 1/60th of a second. (See the Media Loan Vivitar Guide for flash instructions.)
====Focus====
While looking through the viewfinder, turn the focusing ring until your subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
Another way of setting the focus is to
# measure or estimate the distance from the camera to the subject and
# turn the focus ring to the number of feet.
====Taking a Photograph====
# Turn on '''light meter''' by removing the lens cap.
# While looking through the viewfinder, turn the '''focusing ring''' (on the lens) until subject comes into '''sharp focus'''.
# Set the '''exposure''' by rotating the aperture ring (f stop) ring of the lens until the needle on the right side of the viewfinder image is at the center position.
# Hold the camera firmly and release the '''shutter''' and then '''advance the film''' advance lever for the next picture.
====Rewind the film====
You've exposed the last frame of film when the counter is on 20, 24 or 36 and the advance lever will not move.
# Press the black film '''rewind button''' on the bottom of the camera and
# '''crank your film''' back into its cassette by flipping the rewind crank out and turning it slowly in the '''direction of the arrow''' (clockwise).
# When you feel the tension release, '''turn the crank several additional turns''' and then
# '''pull up on the rewind crank''' until the back pops open.
# Remove the film cassette;
# push the rewind crank back down;
# close the back of the camera and
# make sure the lens cap is back on.
===Questions?===
Ask or call a Media Loan staff person.

* '''Location:''' Library 2504
* '''Phone:''' (360) 867-6253

[[category:Media Loan]]

Longhouse 1007A

2013-08-15T20:00:40Z

Kisaar24:

[[Category:Media Classrooms]]
[[file:Figure1and2.jpg]]
===LAPTOP: (You may play a DVD through your laptop.)===
#Lower projection screen using the Projector Screen switch.
#Press the ON button to turn on the Data Projector. Projector will take 30 seconds to warm up. ON button will stop blinking when Projector is ready.
#Select PC.
#Insert VGA cable from laptop into computer Input Jack. Insert audio cable into the Audio Input.
#Turn On your Laptop.
#Use the Volume knob to adjust audio levels.

==VCR/DVD:==
#Using an RCA cable, connect the video and audio outputs of the VCR/DVD player to the 'Video', 'Left Audio' and 'Right Audio' inputs on the panel.
#Press video toggle on (figure 2).

==Microphones:==

====Wired Microphone(’s):====
#Connect XLR cable into either input, Mic 1 or Mic 2, On Figure 1/Figure 3.
#Connect microphone into other end of the XLR cable.
#Adjust volume using the trim knobs above the mic inputs, (Figure 1)/(Figure 3).
#Additional volume can be controlled from the other panel’s volume control, (Figure 2)/(Figure 4).

====Wireless Microphone(’s):====
The Longhouse wireless microphones can be checked out from Media Loan (Faculty only).
There are two microphones, one for each room. The microphone with yellow tape only works in 1007A.
The microphone with red tape works in 1007B or can be combined to have audio in both rooms (see ‘combining’).
# power on the microphone by holding down the red button on the bottom of the microphone.
# The “Mic” button on the side of the microphone is a mute switch. when illuminated red, the mic is on.
# Volume can be controlled using the volume toggle on panel. (Figure 2)/(Figure 4).

==Combining==
(If you are using 1007A and 1007B as a single room, the combine switch must be set to ‘Combined’.
Contact Electronic for assistance. X6270. )

====Dual Projection:====
#Connect VGA cable from 1007B (The side with the combine switch) into your laptop. (Dual screen will not work if you are using the VGA cable in 1007A).
#On the panels in Figure 2 And Figure 4, In Both Rooms select the “PC” inputs.

====Dual Room Wired Microphone:====
*follow the same steps as a single room wired mic.
You must connect the mic into Figure 1 in 1007B (The side with the combine switch).

====Dual Room Wireless Microphone:====
*Follow the same steps as a single room wireless microphone.
You must use the wireless mic labled B.

File:Figure1and2.jpg

2013-08-15T19:59:55Z

Kisaar24: